{\rtf1\ansi\ansicpg1252\deff0\deflang1031\deftab708{\fonttbl{\f0\froman\fcharset0 Times New Roman;}{\f1\fswiss\fcharset0 Arial;}} {\colortbl ;\red0\green0\blue255;} {\*\generator Msftedit 5.41.15.1503;}\viewkind4\uc1\pard\sb120\sa120\b\caps\f0\fs36 Think for Yourself; Question Authority\fs24\par Contents\par \pard\sb120\sa120\tqr\tldot\tx8777 Introduction\tab 2\par \ul 1. Biography\ulnone\tab 11\par \ul 2. \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 /The Seven Levels of Consciousness (the 60s)\ulnone\tab 18\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\b0\scaps\caps0\fs20 2.1. Ancient models are good but not enough\tab 18\par 2.2. \ldblquote The Seven Tongues of God\rdblquote\tab 19\par 2.3. Leary\rquote s model of the Seven Levels of Consciousness\tab 23\par 2.4. The importance of \ldblquote set\rdblquote and \ldblquote setting\rdblquote\tab 27\par 2.5. The political and ethical aspects of Leary\rquote s \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy\rdblquote\tab 29\par 2.6. Leary\rquote s impact on the young generation of the 60s\tab 31\par \pard\li400\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i\scaps0 2.6.1. \ldblquote ACID IS NOT FOR EVERYBODY\rdblquote\tab 34\par \pard\sb120\sa120\tqr\tldot\tx8777\ul\b\i0\caps\fs24 3. Exo-Psychology (the 70s)\ulnone\tab 37\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\b0\scaps\caps0\fs20 3.1. S.M.I.\'b2L.E. to fuse with the Higher Intelligence\tab 39\par 3.2. Imprinting and conditioning\tab 42\par 3.3. The Eight Circuits of Consciousness\tab 43\par 3.4. Neuropolitics: Representative government replaced by an \ldblquote electronic nervous system\rdblquote\tab 52\par 3.5. Better living through technology/ The impact of Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory\tab 55\par \pard\sb120\sa120\tqr\tldot\tx8777\ul\b\scaps0\caps\fs24 4. \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 (the 80s and 90s)\ulnone\tab 61\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\b0\scaps\caps0\fs20 4.1. Quantum Psychology\tab 64\par \pard\li400\tx1200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i\scaps0 4.1.1. The Philosophy of Chaos\tab 65\par 4.1.2. Quantum physics and the \ldblquote user-friendly\rdblquote Quantum universe\tab 66\par \pard\li400\tqr\tldot\tx8777 4.1.3. The info-starved \ldblquote tri-brain amphibian\rdblquote\tab 69\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i0\scaps 4.2. Countercultures (the Beat Generation, the hippies, the cyberpunks/ the New Breed)\tab 72\par \pard\li400\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i\scaps0 4.2.1. The cyberpunk\tab 76\par 4.2.2. The organizational principles of the \ldblquote cyber-society\rdblquote\tab 80\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i0\scaps 4.3. The observer-created universe\tab 84\par 4.4. The Sociology of LSD\tab 88\par 4.5. Designer Dying/The postbiological options of the Information Species\tab 91\par 4.6. A comparison/summary of Leary\rquote s theories\tab 97\par 4.7. A critical analysis of the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s\tab 103\par \pard\li400\tqr\tldot\tx8777\i\scaps0 4.7.1. The evolution of the cybernetic counterculture\tab 104\par 4.7.2. Deus ex machina: a deadly phantasy?\tab 106\par 4.7.3. This trip is over\tab 115\par 4.7.4. McLuhan revisited\tab 119\par \pard\sb120\sa120\tqr\tldot\tx8777\ul\b\i0\caps\fs24 5. Conclusion\ulnone\tab 123\par \pard\li200\tqr\tldot\tx8777\b0\scaps\caps0\fs20 5.1. Leary: a pioneer of cyberspace\tab 123\par 5.2. Think for Yourself, Question Authority\tab 124\par \pard\sb120\sa120\tqr\tldot\tx8777\b\scaps0\caps\fs24 Sources\tab 130\par \pard\caps0\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qc\f1\fs28 Introduction\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\f0\fs24\par \par \pard\fi-1559\li1984\qj\tx1985\lang1033\fs20 psychedelic:\tab\ldblquote Psychedelic\rdblquote \endash coming from the Greek \ldblquote psyche\rdblquote (soul) and \ldblquote delein,\rdblquote to make manifest, or \ldblquote deloun,\rdblquote to show, reveal \endash was first proposed in 1956 by [Humphry] Osmond [...] to describe the effects of mind-altering drugs like mescaline and LSD.\par \pard\fi-1559\li1985\qj\tx1985\tab\tab\tab\tab\tab\par \pard\qj\tx2127\lang1031 (Peter Stafford)\par \pard\qj\tx1985\tab\par \pard\li1985\qj\tx1985\lang1033 [...] a psychedelic drug is one which, without causing physical addiction, craving, major psychological disturbances, delirium, disorientation, or amnesia, more or less reliably produces thought, mood, and perceptual changes otherwise rarely experienced except in dreams, contemplative and religious exaltation, flashes of vivid involuntary memory, and acute psychoses.\par \par (Lester Grinspoon and James B. Bakalar)\par \pard\qj\par \pard\fi-1559\li1985\qj\tx1985 cybernetic(s):\tab Norbert Wiener, in 1948, invented the term \ldblquote cybernetics\rdblquote to describe control [and communication] systems using computers. Since then the prefix cyber is used in connection with robots and computers: cybersex, cyberfeminsim, cyberpunk [...].\par \par (Joanna Buick and Zoran Jevtic)\par \par \pard\fi-1979\li1979\qj\tx1985 cyberspace: \tab [William] Gibson invented the word cyberspace in \i Neuromancer\i0 , describing it with these phrases: \ldblquote A consensual hallucination experienced daily by billions of legitimate operators, in every nation... A graphic representation of data abstracted from the banks of every computer in the human system. Unthinkable complexity. Lines of light ranged in the nonspace of the mind, clusters and constellations of data. Like city lights, receding.\rdblquote [Gibson\rquote s] dream of literally \ldblquote plugging in\rdblquote to a computer via a jack that goes into the back of your head is still science fiction. The trend in the 90s is to try to get a \ldblquote plugged-in\rdblquote feeling simply by using very advanced sound and graphics displays. Thus Gibson\rquote s \ldblquote cyberspace\rdblquote has permutated into today\rquote s \ldblquote virtual reality\rdblquote [...].\par (Rudy Rucker, R. U. Sirius, and Queen Mu) \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\fs24\par \lang1033 Many people know that Timothy Leary was an advocate of psychedelic drugs, especially LSD, which made him a cultfigure of the hippies. With his famous slogan \ldblquote Turn on \endash Tune in \endash Drop out\rdblquote Leary encouraged the young generation of the 60s to take psychedelic drugs and question authority. Not so many people know, however, that Leary reemerged in the 1980s as a spokesman of a new global counterculture called the cyberpunks and became one of the most energetic promoters of computers, virtual reality, and the Internet. \ldblquote No magazine cover story on the [cyberpunk] phenomenon is complete without the septuagenarian Timothy Leary, admonishing readers to \ldblquote turn on, boot up, jack in\rdblquote and proclaiming that the \ldblquote PC is the LSD of the 1990s,\rdblquote writes cultural critic Mark Dery in \i Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century\i0 (Dery 1996: 22). \par In contrast to the hippies of the 60s who were decidedly anti-science and anti-technology, the cyberpunks of the 80s and 90s ecstatically embrace technology. They believe that technology (especially computers and the Internet) can help us to transcend all limits, that it can liberate us from authority and even enables us to transcend space, time, and body. Originally, the term \ldblquote cyberpunk\rdblquote was used to describe a subgenre of science fiction. Cyberpunk science fiction is primarily concerned with computers and their interaction with humans. The first and most influential cyberpunk novel is William Gibson\rquote s \i Neuromancer\i0 (Gibson 1984, 1995). In \i Neuromancer\i0 ,\i \i0 Gibson describes a world of outlaw computer hackers who are able to link up their brains to computer networks and operate in cyberspace. In the late 80s, Cyberpunk escaped from being a literary genre into cultural reality. Media philosopher R. U. Sirius describes this process as follows:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 People started to call themselves cyberpunks, or the media started calling people cyberpunks. [...] The first people to identify themselves as cyberpunks were adolescent computer hackers who related to the street-hardened characters and the worlds created in the books of William Gibson, Bruce Sterling, John Shirley, and others. [...In 1988] cyberpunk hit the front page of the \i New York Times\i0 when some young computer kids were arrested for cracking a government computer file. The \i Times\i0 called these kids \ldblquote cyberpunks.\rdblquote From there, the performers involved in the high-tech-oriented radical art movement generally known as \ldblquote Industrial\rdblquote started to call themselves \endash or be called - cyberpunks [...]. Finally, cyberpunk has come to be seen as a generic name for a much larger trend more or less describing anyone who relates to the cyberpunk vision\rdblquote (Rucker 1992: 64).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \fs24 Leary, who called himself a cyberpunk as well, believed that this cyberpunk vision of a world where all limits are transcended has already become reality. The \ldblquote new world\rdblquote that Leary means is cyberspace (virtual reality and \endash in a broader sense \endash all digitally mediated space), which he sees as a boundless reality where time, space and body are perceived as meaningless. \par The question arises: Why did Leary\rquote s focus shift from psychedelic drugs to computers? At first sight psychedelics and computers seem to have nothing in common. From a (counter-)cultural point of view, they seem to be complete opposites. The hippies, for example, saw psychedelics as an antidote to technology which stereotypes our consciousness and desensitizes our perception. In the 60s, Leary himself was very much against computers. He saw them as devices that would merely increase the dependence of individuals on experts. As Leary put it: \ldblquote [A]t that time, computers were mainframes that cost millions of dollars and were owned by Bell Telephone company, IBM, CIA, Department of Motor Vehicles \endash no friends of mine! So I had this prejudice that computers were things that stapled you and punched you and there were these monks, the few experts, who controlled it\rdblquote (quoted in Rucker 1992: 84).\par In the early 80s, however, when thanks to smaller size and cheaper prize computers became accessible to millions of people, Leary changed his attitude towards computers and realized that psychedelic drugs and computers actually have very much in common. He discovered that psychedelic drugs and personal computers \ldblquote are simply two ways in which individuals have learned to take the power back from the state\rdblquote (ibid.). Leary argues that both psychedelics and computers can help us to liberate ourselves from authority and \ldblquote create our own realities.\rdblquote In the course of his long career as psychologist and counterculture philosopher Leary wrote more than thirty books (several of them more than 400 pages long) in which he offers us very elaborate theories - using concepts from the fields of psychology, neurobiology, ethology, quantum physics, cybernetics, and chaos theory - that explain how we can use psychedelic drugs and computers to escape the \ldblquote narrow reality tunnels\rdblquote that authorities force us to live in and create our own individual realities whose limits are determined only by the limits of our imagination. \par What are those \ldblquote narrow reality tunnels\rdblquote Leary is talking about? According to Leary, we have been programmed by our parents, politicians, priests, and teachers to think and see the world the way they want us to think and see the world. For example, they programmed us to think in terms of dominance and submission so that for us it seems normal that there are a few who have power and create the rules while all the others are submissive, law-abiding citizens. Leary makes us aware that the models of reality the authorities are imposing on us are not reflections of an objective reality; they are just arbitrary constructions. What we accept as objective reality is actually a social fabrication, a construction of our minds, that is, our nervous systems. Only if we are able to control our own nervous systems \endash which means that we know how our brains operate \endash would we be able to change the realities we live in. Leary describes his books as \ldblquote manuals on the use of the human nervous system.\rdblquote (Leary\rquote s \i Info-Psychology\i0 , for example, is subtitled \ldblquote A manual on the use of the human nervous system according to the instructions of the manufacturers.\rdblquote ) In his theories, Leary explains how we can use psychedelics and computers to \ldblquote metaprogram\rdblquote our \ldblquote brain-software\rdblquote (the categories through which we perceive the world, our overall cultural worldview, etc). \par According to Leary, the hippies were the first generation in human history that knew how to \ldblquote control their own nervous systems, change their own realities,\rdblquote using psychedelic drugs to metaprogram their \ldblquote bio-computers\rdblquote (brains). In \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 , Leary writes that the hippies started an individual-freedom movement which is new to human history because \ldblquote it is not based on geography, politics, class, or religion. \i It has to do not with changes in the political structure\i0 , nor in who controls the police\i , but in the individual mind \i0 [italics mine]\ldblquote (PE 3). According to Leary, the individual-freedom revolution started by the hippies in the 60s was continued in the 80s by young people using cybernetic technology (computers, the Internet, TV, etc) to undermine authoritarian dogmatic social structures and create their own (digital) realities. Leary points out that this freedom movement - which has country by country, continent by continent, liberated much of the world in the last three decades (fall of the Berlin Wall, resignation of the hard-line regime in Czechoslovakia, etc) - would not have been possible without mind-expanding drugs and mind-linking electronic appliances accessible to individuals (cf. ibid.). In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary predicts that psychedelic drugs and computers will help this movement to create a post-political \ldblquote cyber-society\rdblquote that is based on individual freedom and Ecstasy - defined by Leary as \ldblquote the experience of attaining freedom of limitations, self imposed or external\rdblquote (PE 2). Leary backs his idea of the cyber-society with an interesting interpretation of chaos theory.\par In this paper I am going to describe the development of Leary\rquote s theories (how his focus shifted from psychedelics to computers) and discuss the impact Leary had on the psychedelic counterculture of the 60s (the hippies) and the cybernetic counterculture of the 80s and 90s (the cyberpunks and cyber-hippies). I want to compare Leary\rquote s earlier theories, in which he praises LSD as the key to cosmic consciousness and sweeping societal change, to his later theories, in which he praises the computer as a tool of liberation and transcendence. This comparison will help me to show that that the hippies and the cyberpunks \endash who, at first sight, seem to have nothing in common except the fact that they are both countercultures (i.e., counter to the leading culture) - have much more in common than one would think. I will argue that the cyberpunks and cyber-hippies were strongly influenced by the transcendentalist ideas that prevailed in the 60s counterculture. (Although it is indebted to ideas of recent vintage such as chaos theory, the cyber-hippies\rquote techno-transcendentalism owes much to the 60s counterculture \endash specifically, to the ideas of 60s-cult-authors like Leary or Marshall McLuhan.) Another thing we will see when we examine Leary\rquote s theories is that the hippies were not nearly as rural and anti-technological as some cultural critics argue. According to Leary, the hippies and the cyberpunks/cyber-hippies share the same aim (individual freedom, ecstasy); only the technologies the cyberpunks use to reach this aim are different ones.\par There are several reasons why I decided to write this rather extensive paper on Leary: First of all, many cultural critics and media philosophers writing about countercultures (e.g., Theodore Roszak, Mark Dery, and Douglas Rushkoff) argue that Leary \ldblquote exerted a significant influence on the youth culture of the 60s\rdblquote (Roszak 1995: 164) and portray him as a leading figure of the \ldblquote cyberdelic\rdblquote (cybernetic-psychedelic) counterculture of the 90s (cf. Dery 1996: 22, cf. Rushkoff 1995: 49f.). None of them, however, gives a comprehensive overview of Leary\rquote s theories which have influenced thousands of young people who read Leary\rquote s books. I decided to give such an overview because I want to show that Leary has more to offer than a few catchphrases (like \ldblquote turn on, tune in, drop out\rdblquote ). Furthermore, I think that an overview of Leary\rquote s different theories can be very helpful to discover interesting connections between his early theories, in which he expresses the most important beliefs that prevailed in the apolitical wing of the 60s counterculture, and his later theories, which are a synthesis of the most important beliefs and ideas that prevail in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s.\par Another reason why I decided to write this paper on Leary is that in his theories Leary expresses a worldview that is becoming more and more important in science and philosophy, as well as in everyday life in our postmodern Information Society: the constructivist worldview. An old Talmudic saying perfectly describes this worldview in one single sentence: We do not see things as they are, we see them as we are. Paul Watzlawick, a leading exponent of the metatheory known as constructivism, explains this \lang1031 sentence as follows: \ldblquote [J]ede Wirklichkeit [ist] im unmittelbaren Sinne die \i Konstruktion\i0 derer [...], die diese Wirklichkeit zu entdecken und erforschen \i glauben\i0 . Anders ausgedr\'fcckt: Das vermeintlich \i Ge\i0 fundene ist ein \i Er\i0 fundenes, dessen Erfinder sich des Aktes seiner Erfindung nicht bewu\'dft ist, sondern sie als Grundlage seines \lquote Wissens\rquote und daher seines Handelns macht\rdblquote (Watzlawick 1998: 9f.).\lang1033 Constructivists argue that humans impose order on their sensory experience of the outside world, rather than discern order from the world, and they create knowledge rather than discover it (cf. Spivey 1997: 3). \par Many constructivists focus their attention on the metaphysical issue of the nature of reality, trying to answer the question to what extent humans can learn about and experience reality, or, put another way, to what extent we create our realities. In general, they point to the role of the observer in any observations that are made of the \ldblquote world.\rdblquote The quantum physicists (Albert Einstein, Werner Heisenberg, Max Planck, et al) were the ones who, in the 1920s, introduced constructivist concepts to the world of physics. In contrast to Descartes and Newton who argued that the world is made up of a multitude of separate objects existing independently of the observer, the quantum physicists suggested that the universe is \ldblquote a network of dynamic relationships that \i include the human observer and his or her consciousness in an essential way\i0 [italics mine]\rdblquote (Capra 1982: 47). (I will explain this quotation in the chapter \ldblquote The observer created universe\rdblquote ). Leary was very much influenced by the ideas of Einstein and Heisenberg. In practically all of his books he discusses the philosophical implications of quantum theory. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , for example, he offers us a very bold interpretation of quantum theory which he uses to back his idea that computers enable us to create our own realities which, according to Leary, are as real as the so called material reality. However, the method that helped Leary to discover that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of our minds was not quantum physics but psychedelics. Leary explains: \ldblquote Since psychedelic drugs expose us to different levels of perception, and experience, use of them is ultimately a philosophic enterprise, compelling us to confront the nature of reality and the nature of our fragile, subjective belief systems. The contrast is what triggers the laughter, the terror. We discover abruptly that we have been programmed all these years, that everything we accepted as reality is just a social fabrication\rdblquote (FB 33).\par \fs20 \fs24 Another reason why I decided to write this paper on Leary is that I want to show that Leary was one of the founding fathers of cyberpunk. As early as 1973, Leary predicted that some day the world would be linked through an \ldblquote electronic nervous system\rdblquote (the Internet) and that computers could be used to empower the individual (cf. NP 45f.). In this paper, I want to make people aware of the fact that several important figures of the cybermovement (e.g., R. U. Sirius) were strongly influenced by Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory which Leary describes in \i Neuropolitics\i0 (Leary 1977), \i Exo-Psychology\i0 (Leary 1977), and \i The Intelligence Agents\i0 (Leary 1979). \par As far as the organization of this paper is concerned, I choose to describe Leary\rquote s different theories in chronological order because this is the best way to show how Leary\rquote s focus shifted from drugs to computers. The first chapter is a short biography of Leary. I decided to include it because in my opinion we can never fully understand Leary\rquote s theories if we do not know anything about his background (how a sober, buttoned up psychologist became a drug guru of the 60s counterculture, etc). In this biography, I will also shortly describe Leary\rquote s revolutionary approach to psychotherapy which earned him a post at Harvard. (Leary\rquote s humanistic approach to behavior change \endash he emphasized inner potential and personal growth through self-reliance, so patients avoid dependence on authoritarian doctors and dogmas \endash is relevant to this paper because it helps me to show that Leary has always encouraged people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority.\rdblquote )\par Thematically as well as chronologically, Leary\rquote s theories can be categorized into three phases:\par \pard{\pntext\f0 1.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart1\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360\i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 /The Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness (the 60s)\par \pard{\pntext\f0 2.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart2\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 Exo-Psychology (the 70s)\par \pard{\pntext\f0 3.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart3\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360\i Chaos and Cyberculture\i0 /Quantum-Psychology (the 80s and 90s)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj In chapter two, I will describe Leary\rquote s Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness (a theory on psychedelic drugs and their effects on human consciousness) and examine the political, ethical, and philosophical implications of this theory. After describing this theory I will discuss Leary\rquote s impact on the 60s counterculture. \par Chapter three deals with Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory in which Leary encourages the hippies to let go of the flower-power-60s and find a way to live with technology. (According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, technology has the potential to liberate us from all limits. Leary argues that psychedelics and other technologies enable us to decipher the DNA code, which is the key to immortality) After explaining the most important concepts of Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, I will show that in this theory Leary laid the ideological foundation for the cybermovement of the 80s and 90s. I will argue that R. U. Sirius and Bruce Eisner, two leading figures of the cybermovement, were strongly influenced by Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology. \par In chapter four, I will discuss the most important book that Leary wrote in the 90s, \i Chaos and Cyberculture\i0 , in which he conveys his vision of the emergence of a new humanism with an emphasis on questioning authority, independent thinking, individual creativity, and the empowerment of computers and other new technologies. In \i Chaos and Cyberculture\i0 , Leary gives voice to nearly all of cyberculture\rquote s received truths, foremost among them the idea that \ldblquote the basic elements of the universe are bits of (0/1) information,\rdblquote which Leary tries to back with a bold interpretation of quantum physics (Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory). I will explain Leary\rquote s concept of the \ldblquote cyberpunk,\rdblquote describe the philosophy that lies behind this term, and trace the origin of the term \ldblquote cybernetics.\rdblquote Furthermore, I will give an overview of Leary\rquote s theory of the evolution of countercultures (the Beats, the hippies, the cyberpunks), present his explanation for the comeback of LSD in the 90s, and give an outline of Leary\rquote s last book \i Design for Dying\i0 , in which Leary encourages us to design our deaths and predicts that soon computers and other new technologies will enable us to become immortal. (Leary\rquote s prediction in \i Design for Dying \i0 that we will soon be able to download our brains into computers and exist as electronic life forms is a logical consequence of the assumption that the basic elements of the universe are bits of information. \i Design for Dying \i0 makes Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory complete.)\par Chapter 4.6. is a comparison of Leary\rquote s different theories. This comparison shows that all of Leary\rquote s theories are based on the belief that science and technology can help us to attain freedom, enlightenment, and immortality. Leary has never been a technophobe, he has always believed in technology. The controversial Harvard psychologist was very well aware that he was \ldblquote turning on the world\rdblquote with a high-tech product (LSD), that \ldblquote no counterculture Earth Mother gave us lysergic acid \endash it came from a Sandoz lab,\rdblquote as cyberpunk novelist Bruce Sterling put it (Sterling 1986: xiii) \par In chapter 4.7., I argue that Leary was a central figure in the cyberdelic (psychedelic-cybernetic) counterculture of the 90s and that, in his Quantum Psychology theory, Leary expresses the most important beliefs that prevail in this counterculture. I will trace the roots of the cyberdelic (cybernetic-psychedelic) counterculture of the 90s and critically discuss the most important ideas and believes that prevail in this counterculture by comparing two interesting analyses of the cyberdelic phenomenon: Douglas Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia,\i0 and Mark Dery\rquote s \i Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century\i0 . This discussion shows that, from a countercultural point of view, the 90s are in many ways a return of the 60s. (Leary is a perfect example for this return of the 60s. He was a cultfigure of the 60s counterculture and he reemerged as an important spokesman of the cyberdelic counterculture of the 80s and 90s, encouraging people to \ldblquote turn on, boot up, jack in.\rdblquote ) Furthermore, this discussion will help me to uncover the weak points of Leary\rquote s Quantum psychology theory (his concepts of the cyber society and the \ldblquote posthuman\rdblquote ). Criticizing Leary\rquote s Quantum psychology theory, I will focus on the philosophy that this theory is based on (the notion that reality is an arbitrary construction, that we have chosen our reality arbitrarily).\par In the final chapter, I will argue that\lang1031 Leary\rquote s whole trip from psychedelics to computers to designer dying was to make people aware that they are capable of more than the appointed authorities would prefer to grant them. Leary\rquote s advocacy of psychedelics and computers was to show that people are capable of taking charge of their own brains, hearts, and spirits. For me, \lang1033 Leary is the Socrates of the Inforamtion Age because he was one of the few philosophers in our age who carried on the Socratic tradition of teaching people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority.\rdblquote Many of Leary\rquote s predictions concerning the impact of psychedelics and computers on our culture turned out to be wrong. Leary, however, did never feel embarrassed when one of his predictions turned out to be wrong because he did not want people to blindly believe what he said anyway. His aim was to teach people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority,\rdblquote his own authority included.\par When reading this paper, keep in mind that Leary\rquote s theories are based on the assumption the limits of our reality/-ies are determined by the limits of our imagination. As psychoanalyst, cyberneticist and psychedelic explorer John Lilly put it in \i The Center of the Cyclone\i0 , \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In the province of the mind, what is believed to be true is true or becomes true, within limits to be found experientially and experimentally. These limits are further beliefs to be transcended. In the province of the mind, there are no limits. This is one of the major messages I wish to give you about inner trips, whether by LSD, by mediation, by hypnosis, by Gestalt therapy, by group work, by studies whatever means one uses (Lilly 1972: xvi).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par \par \par \par \pard\ul\b\f1\fs28 1. Biography\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\ulnone\b0\f0\fs24\par \lang1031 Timothy Leary\lang1033 was born on October 22, 1920 in Springfield, Massachusetts. His grandfather, Dr. Timothy Leary, after whom his father \ldblquote Tote\rdblquote and Timothy himself were named, was considered to be the richest Irish Catholic in western Massachusetts. He published works on blood circulation. The Learys were \ldblquote urban, urbane, well-to-do [...] sexy, funloving and selforiented\rdblquote (FB 24-26). Leary\rquote s mother was also an Irish Catholic but she came from a different social scene. According to Leary, Abigail\rquote s side of the family was \ldblquote traditional, family oriented, suspicious of all things joyous, frivolous, or newfangled\rdblquote (FB 26). Tote was \ldblquote contemptuous of those who worked for the system\rdblquote (FB 38). He practiced dentistry sporadically, as \ldblquote a gentlemanly hobby\rdblquote (cf. FB 38). Timothy turned out to be a smart boy. At the age of ten, when he was reading eight to ten books a week, his grandfather gave him the advice: \ldblquote Never do anything like anyone else, boy [...] Find your own way\rdblquote (FB 24).When Timothy was fourteen his alcoholic father left the family, because he was disappointed about the fact that the inheritance from his father was just a few thousand dollars.\par After High School Timothy went to Holy Cross, a Jesuit college. He left Holy Cross after about one year, because he was accepted at the military academy West Point. After dropping out of West Point, because he committed a rules infraction, Leary became a psychology major at the University of Alabama. It didn\rquote t take long, however, until he was expelled from university for sleeping over at the girl\rquote s dormitory, which was in 1942 (cf. FB 137). Leary\rquote s draft deferment was cancelled, so he was drafted. Since the army needed psychologists they let Leary finish his degree in the service. In 1944, Leary met Mariannne (?), an audio technician. They married the same year and had two children, Susan and Jack. Leary received his master\rquote s degree in psychology at Washington State University. His thesis was a statistical study of the dimensions of intelligence (Leary 1946). Leary and Marianne moved to Berkeley. Leary earned a doctorate in psychology from the University of California Berkeley (Leary 1950), and over the next few years conducted research in psychotherapy. By the 50s he was teaching at Berkeley and had been appointed Director of Psychological Research at the Kaiser Foundation Hospital in Oakland (cf. FB 16). His book \i The Interpersonal Diagnosis of\i0 \i Personality\i0 (Leary 1957) enjoyed much success. His personal life, however, took a turn for the worse. His depressive wife committed suicide on Leary\rquote s 35\super th\nosupersub birthday.\par Leary quit his post at Berkeley because he felt that he was \ldblquote practicing a profession that didn\rquote t seem to work\rdblquote (FB 16). Psychology still had not developed a way of significantly and predictably changing human behavior. Leary\rquote s studies showed that one third of the patients who received psychotherapy got better, one third got worse and one third stayed the same. Together with Susan and Jack, Leary moved to Florence, Italy. In spring 1960, Leary got a teaching post at Harvard University, Massachusetts, because the Director of the Harvard Center of Personality Research, McClelland, considered Leary\rquote s revolutionary approach to psychotherapy to be the future of American Psychology. Leary\rquote s theory on existential transaction (Leary 1960) suggested that the whole relationship between patient and therapists should be changed to a more egalitarian information exchange.\par On a vacation in Mexico in 1960, Leary was offered some of the so-called \ldblquote sacred mushrooms\rdblquote by an anthropologist from the University of Mexico, who got them from a shaman. (The reader interested in the history of these mushrooms is referred to Gordon R. Wasson\'b4s \i Soma: Divine\i0 \i Mushroom of Immortality\i0 and Terence McKenna\'b4s \i Food of the Gods.\i0 ) Leary ate the mushrooms which contained the psychedelic psilocybin. During the mushroom inebriation he entered into a state of mystic-religious ecstasy, which he later called \ldblquote the deepest religious experience of his life\rdblquote (Weil 1973:191). Like so many mystics before him he discovered that \ldblquote the world \endash so manifestly real \endash was actually a tiny stage set constructed by the mind,\rdblquote that human beings are all programmed and \ldblquote everything we accept as reality is just a social fabrication (FB 32 f.). In his autobiography, \i Flashbacks\i0 , he explains that, \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In four hours by that swimming pool in Guernavaca I learned more about the mind, the brain and its structures than I did in the preceding 15 years as a diligent psychologist.\par \pard\li708\qj I learned that the brain is an underutilized biocomputer containing billions of unaccessed neurons. I learned that normal consciousness is one drop in an ocean of intelligence. That consciousness and intelligence can be systematically expanded. The brain can be reprogrammed. That the knowledge of how the brain works is the most pressing scientific issue of our time. I was beside myself with enthusiasm, convinced we had found the key [for behavior change] we had been looking for (FB 33).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \fs24 This was the turning point of his life. Leary, together with his colleague Frank Barron, persuaded Harvard to allow them to study the effects of psychedelic drugs. (It should be mentioned here that at that time most psychedelic drugs were still legal.)\par Leary did not follow the medical model of Behaviorism, which is the model of giving drugs to others and then observing the external results. His idea was that the scientist first should teach him-/herself how to use the drug and then take it together with the \ldblquote patient.\rdblquote Furthermore, Leary was not out to discover new laws, which is to say, to discover the redundant implications of his own premises. This approach, which is the approach of Humanistic Psychology, was considered to be unscientific by many psychologists at that time. Leary also felt that the term \ldblquote psychotomimetic\rdblquote (which means \ldblquote mimicking psychosis\rdblquote ), which was used in psychology of that time to describe the effects of hallucinogenic drugs, was inadequate, because it reflected a negative, pathological orientation and did not include concepts of enriching the mind and enlarging the vision. He used the term \ldblquote psychedelic,\rdblquote meaning \ldblquote mind-manifesting,\rdblquote instead (cf. Lee 1992: 55). Leary\rquote s experiments had interesting results. For example, in one of his formal experiments Leary was able to show that psychedelic drugs can produce deep religious experiences similar to those reported by prophets and mystics throughout the ages (cf. PE 15f.).\par Celebrities such as writers Aldous Huxley and Allen Ginsberg took part in Leary\rquote s experiments. In addition to the formal studies Leary carried out at Harvard, Leary also held psychedelic sessions in his private apartment. In December 1960, Ginsberg came for a visit. Leary and Ginsberg took psilocybin together. While under the influence of the drug, Ginsberg had a vision: \ldblquote I\rquote m the messiah. I\rquote ve come down to preach love to the world. We are going to teach people to stop hating\rdblquote (FB 48f). During the experience Ginsberg became convinced, that psychedelic drugs held the promise of changing mankind, curing sick society. His plan was that everybody should take mind-expanding drugs. Ginsberg\rquote s vision struck a chord in Leary. From then on, Leary saw himself as the messiah whose mission was to enlighten the whole world with psychedelic drugs. Leary believed that political problems were manifestations of psychological problems, which at the bottom were neurological-chemical (cf. FB 50). Together with Ginsberg, Leary started turning on the Beat poets Jack Kerouac, Neal Cassady, Charles Olson, and William Burroughs to psylocibin (cf. FB 49-52, cf. Lee 1992: 80).\par It was Michael Hollingshead, a British philosophy student, who gave LSD to Leary (cf. FB 117). LSD is a synthetic psychedelic - first synthesized by Albert Hofmann, a Swiss scientist, in 1938, while seeking for a pain killer for migraine headaches (cf. Hofmann 1980) \endash which is even stronger than psilocybin. When Leary took LSD he experienced the most shattering experience of his life: \rdblquote Pilocybin had sucked me down into nerve nets, into body organs,[...] had let me spiral down the DNA ladder of evolution to the beginning of life on this planet. But LSD was something different [...it] had flipped my consciousness into a dance of energy, where nothing existed except whirring vibrations and each illusory form was simply a different frequency\rdblquote (FB 118). From then on, Leary used LSD in his research. With the help of LSD he wanted to get insight into the mechanisms of the brain. He also wanted to develop a language, verbal as well as non-verbal, that makes us able to talk about drug experiences in a scientific way.\par When it became public that Leary administered drugs to students (who phoned home to announce they had found God) and got \ldblquote high\rdblquote with his test subjects, Harvard insisted that Leary stopped his experiments. Leary was accused by various scientists of leading his experiments in an unscientific way. Since Leary and his colleague Richard Alpert would not stop their experiments (\ldblquote LSD is more important than Harvard,\rdblquote Leary said) they were expelled from Harvard in spring 1963. After the \ldblquote Harvard scandal\rdblquote most major US magazines featured stories about Leary and LSD, so Leary was suddenly known all over the US as \ldblquote Mr. LSD\rdblquote (cf. Lee 1992: 88). During their time at Harvard Leary and Alpert had also started a private drug research project, the International Foundation of Internal Freedom (IFIF), which they continued after their expulsion (cf. Lee 1992: 96). The aim of the project was to study the religious use of psychedelics. It did not take long until the organization counted 3000 due-paying members. Offices were set up all across America. In the summer of 1963, the headquaters of the organization were moved to a hotel in Zihuatanejo, Mexico. A group of Beatniks and bohemians followed Leary to Mexico, but were not allowed to participate in the research programs. It only took six weeks until the IFIF was expelled from Mexico (cf. Lee 1992, 97). \par A rich stockbroker, Bill Hitchcock, was very interested in the IFIF\'b4s work, so he offered Leary and Alpert that they could use his mansion in Millbrook, New York, as a place where they could do their research. Leary and Alpert accepted the offer. A core group of about 30 people gathered at Millbrook. IFIF was disbanded and replaced by another organization, the Castilian Foundation (named after an intellectual colony in Hesse\'b4s \i Glass Bead Game\i0 ). The members of the Castilian Foundation lead a communal life and did research on psychedelics and oriental meditation. As a guide for their psychedelic sessions the group was using a text written by Leary called \i The Psychedelic Experience\i0 (Leary 1964). This text is a translation of the old Buddhist text \i The Tibetan Book of the Dead\i0 from English into what Leary calls \ldblquote psychedelic American\rdblquote (cf. FB 199). Millbrook attracted visitors from all walks of life. To name a few, there was the Jazz trumpeter Maynard Ferguson, psychiatrists Humphry Osmond and R. D. Laing, the philosopher Alan Watts, and also a Swedish model named Nina Schlebrugge. In 1964, Leary married Nina Schlebrugge (cf. Lee 1992, 102). However, their relationship did not last long. They parted soon after their honeymoon in India. \par In December 1965, Leary, his children, and his soon to be wife Rosemary Woodruff wanted to go on vacation to Mexico, but Leary was arrested after he and his daughter had been caught with a small amount of marijuana at the border between Mexico and Texas. Leary was sentenced to 30 (!) years in prison (cf. FB 242). While his lawyers appealed the verdict, Leary returned to Millbrook, continuing with drug experiments, and set up a religious group, the League for Spiritual Discovery (L.S.D.).\par Inspired by the media philosopher Marshall McLuhan, Leary started using the media, trying to change the negative associations that people had when they heard the word \ldblquote LSD\rdblquote into positive ones. He promised LSD users beauty, philosophic wonder, religious revelation, increased intelligence, mystical romance, and better sex (cf. FB 251). It was at that time that Leary came up with the slogan \ldblquote Turn On \endash Tune In \endash Drop Out\rdblquote . \ldblquote Turn On\rdblquote meant to go within, with the help of psychedelics, meditation or other methods. It meant to become sensitive to the many levels of consciousness one can reach. \ldblquote Tune In\rdblquote meant to interact harmoniously with the world one is surrounded by, to express one\rquote s new internal perspectives. \ldblquote Drop Out\rdblquote suggested an active process of detachment from involuntary and unconscious commitments (cf. FB 253). What he wanted to express with his slogan is that psychedelics (especially LSD) create a \ldblquote new consciousness\rdblquote and teach you to reject repressive politics, war, violence, military service, racism, erotic hypocrisy, sexism, and established religion (cf. Leary 1995: 8). In 1966, LSD became illegal. For Leary, the criminalization of LSD meant that psychedelics and what he called \ldblquote new consciousness\rdblquote became a political issue indissolubly intertwined with peace, sexual liberation, \ldblquote end the draft\rdblquote , ecology, etc(cf. Leary 1995: 9). In 1968, when the 60s revolution reached its peak , Tim became active socially as an anti- Vietnam protester, sang \ldblquote Give peace a chance\rdblquote with John Lennon and Yoko Ono, and announced his candidacy for governor of California in March 1970 (cf. FB 287). In \i The Politics of Ecstasy,\i0 Leary suggested a new Declaration of Independence based on the idea of personal freedom (freedom to alter one\rquote s own consciousness). In spite of the fact that President Nixon called Leary \ldblquote the most dangerous man on the planet\rdblquote (see \i Timothy Leary is dead\i0 , a documentary about Leary\rquote s life and work by Paul Davis, 1996) things looked good for Leary, because the Texas drug case was overturned by the Supreme Court.\par However, it did not take long until Leary received a 10 year sentence for another arrest for possession of marijuana. He was sent to jail immediately. In September 1970, Leary escaped from prison (cf. FB 291). He fled to Algiers where he was offered asylum with Black Panther Eldridge Cleaver\rquote s government in exile. Since Cleaver put him under house arrest Leary fled to Switzerland and tried to find refuge there. While waiting for asylum, Leary visited Austria, where he acted in an anti-heroin documentary (cf. FB 328). Leary did not get asylum in Switzerland. He was caught by the police in Afghanistan and handed over to the American Drug Enforcement Agency. \par Starting in 1972, Leary spent time in several different prisons and was finally released in 1976 (cf. FB 366). During this time he wrote several books about \ldblquote neurotechnology\rdblquote (methods to control our nervous systems), the most important one of them being \i Exo-Psychology\i0 (Leary 1974). He started giving lectures at colleges and appeared in talk shows. This time, however, his main subject was not LSD, but space migration and life extension. He married Barbara Chase who had a son, Zach. In the early 80s, Leary went on a lecture tour with G. Gordon Liddy (a former law enforcement officer who, in the 60s, raided Millbrook and later was sent to prison because he was involved in the Watergate scandal\fs26 )\fs24 . In their very ironic debates Leary and Liddy caricatured each other\rquote s former roles (cf. Lee 1992: 293). \par During the 80s, Leary turned to computers as his \ldblquote transformational tool of choice\rdblquote and became one of the first promoters of virtual reality and the Internet. He proclaimed that \ldblquote the personal computer is the LSD of the 90s,\rdblquote empowering people on a mass level (cf. CC coverpage). Leary became a spokesman for a new high-tech subculture, the \ldblquote cyberpunks.\rdblquote Furthermore, he started his own software company, Futique Inc., which designs programs that \ldblquote digitize thought-images,\rdblquote produces \ldblquote cyberwear\rdblquote for virtual reality (TV goggles and quadrophonic sound systems that immerse the user in 3-D computer-graphic worlds) and develops educational software for students (cf. FB 384f). Leary went on college lecture tours again and also gave talks on \ldblquote rave parties.\rdblquote His lecture tours became multi-media extravaganzas with live video and music. His books became graphic novels that were products of desktop publishing. Some of his books were converted into psychedelic audio-books or computer programs. For example, \i What does WoMan want?\i0 (a novel written by Leary in 1976) was converted into an interactive computer program, a \ldblquote performance book\rdblquote as Leary calls it (Leary 1988a). Leary designed a web page (\cf1\ul http://www.leary.com\cf0\ulnone ) where people are encouraged to discuss the effects of psychedelic drugs, etc. In 1995, Leary discovered that he had incurable prostate cancer. He refused to be treated in a hospital and \ldblquote designed\rdblquote his dying process to be a party instead. By challenging the solemnity of dying \endash shortly before he died he wrote a book called \i Design for Dying\i0 (Leary 1997b) in which he says that we should question the traditional notion of what dying is and design our dying process the way we like it - Leary broke the last and greatest taboo. Leary passed away on May 31, 1996. His ashes were sent into space. \par \par \par \pard\ul\b\f1\fs28 2. \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 /The Seven Levels of Consciousness (the 60s)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\f0\fs24\par \pard\li4247\qj\tx4253\ulnone\fs20\tab Revolution is a personal matter. You create the world; you must change it.\par \pard\li4248\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx4253 (Paul Williams)\fs24\tab\tab\tab\tab\tab\tab\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj In the 60s, Leary wrote several books on psychedelic drugs and higher levels of consciousness. The most important of them is \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 . It could be said that all of these books describe one more or less consistent theory about human consciousness. I want to call this theory \ldblquote Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness\rdblquote . (I did not choose the name \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy\rdblquote for this theory because I think this title focuses on the political aspect too much. In Leary\rquote s theory, politics, which Leary saw as a primitive struggle for power and territory, is only one stage in the development of human consciousness towards enlightenment. Leary thought that we should leave politics behind and move on to higher levels of consciousness. It should be mentioned here that the title \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy\rdblquote was not Leary\rquote s idea. It was Abbie Hoffman who suggested this title to Leary (cf. PE 1).) In this chapter, I want to describe the Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness and discuss Leary\rquote s impact on the 60s counterculture. \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\fs28 2.1. Ancient models are good but not enough\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par Leary\rquote s work, especially the theory about human consciousness he developed in the early 60s, was very much influenced by Eastern philosophies and religions. In his spiritual approach to psychedelic experiences Leary felt affirmed by the discovery of ancient Asian spiritual texts. Ancient Asian spiritual texts are concerned with transcendence, with learning to go beyond the ego-centered perspectives of ordinary human consciousness, beyond the dualities of right and wrong, beyond space and time, and with becoming liberated from the cravings and fears that characterize human existence. For Buddhists, Hinduists, and Taoists, the method of attaining such liberating transcendence was not psychedelics but meditation. However, Leary was convinced that their goal was essentially the same as that of spiritually oriented psychedelic explorers. Leary translated two of the ancient texts, the Buddhist text \i Tibetan Book of the Dead\i0 and the Taoist text \i Tao Te Ching \i0 from English into what he calls \ldblquote psychedelic American.\rdblquote These two ancient texts describe different levels of consciousness, stages that we have to go through if we want to attain enlightenment. There are seven levels in the Buddhist text, five levels in the Taoist text. Both texts are concerned with giving up the supremacy of the \ldblquote egohood\rdblquote and entering a mystical state of illumination which goes beyond form, that is, beyond words and \ldblquote hallucinatory struggles.\rdblquote Leary used these translations as guide books for his psychedelic sessions.\par The most important essays that describe Leary\rquote s own theory about human consciousness can be found in \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 . This book was first published in 1968. It is a collection of essays and lectures on psychedelic drug experience and the personal, social, and political changes that psychedelics were supposed to bring about. In \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 , Leary praises LSD as the\i key to altering our consciousness\i0 , which can help us to increase our intelligence, creativity, sexual pleasures, philosophical insight, to abolish authoritarian dogmatic social structures, and to speed up the evolution of humankind in general. On the basis of his drug experiments at Harvard and personal experiences with the psychedelic drugs LSD and psilocybin, Leary built an all-encompassing theory about human consciousness, which is a synthesis of eastern philosophy and western science and gives answers to basic questions of philosophy, psychology, politics and religion. (Leary was not the first person who tried to create such a synthesis. For example, there were William James, C.G. Jung, and writer and early psychedelic explorer Aldous Huxley who tried to create a synthesis between eastern and western thinking.) In Leary\rquote s opinion ancient eastern texts on the nature of consciousness were helpful but they were only very vague descriptions of the unknown \ldblquote phenomenological territories\rdblquote Leary wanted to explore. Leary thought that he had found a language that was more adequate to describe psychedelic experiences and the nature of human consciousness. The language Leary uses in his Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness is a mixture of scientific vocabulary, mystical terms used in eastern philosophical and religious texts, and psychedelic slang.\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 2.2. \ldblquote The Seven Tongues of God\rdblquote\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24 \par The lecture in which he presented his theory of human consciousness for the first time is a lecture he gave in 1963 at a meeting of Lutheran psychologists. By describing his model of the Seven Levels of Consciousness Leary tried to show that eastern philosophies and discoveries of western science do not contradict but rather complement each other. The lecture, which in \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 appears under the title \ldblquote The Seven Tongues of God\rdblquote (PE 13-58), was originally titled \ldblquote The Religious Experience: Its Production and Interpretation.\rdblquote Leary begins this lecture by describing two formal experiments with psilocybin that were carried out at Harvard. (The description of the first experiment helps to see that his approach to psychotherapy was really revolutionary.)\par The first formal experiment conducted by Leary\rquote s group was a rehabilitation program carried out at the Massachusetts Correctional Institute in Concord, a maximum security prison. The inmates were given (synthetic) psilocybin to find out whether the drug would help prisoners change their ways, thereby lowering the recidivism rate. They formed groups and at least one member of Leary\rquote s group took psilocybin with the prisoners. Part of the project was designed to help ex-inmates (only those who received the drug) get integrated into society again after their release. The study proved successful in the short term, only 25% of those who took the drug ended up in prison again, as compared to the normal return-rate of about 80% (cf. Lee 1992: 75; cf. FB 102). \par The other experiment, which was conducted by Walter Pahnke as part of his Ph.D. dissertation for Harvard Divinity School, dealt with the relationship between drug-induced and naturally occurring religious experiences. In this experiment Pahnke sought to determine, whether the transcendent experiences reported during psychedelic sessions were similar to the mystical experiences described in various holy scriptures and reported by prophets throughout the ages. Pills, half of them containing psilocybin and half of them being placebos, were given to theology students at a Good Friday service. Neither the test subjects nor Leary and Pahnke knew who had received the drug and who had not. The results showed that the participants who took the psilocybin pill had significantly deeper mystical religious experiences than the ones who received placebos in the same situation. Leary concluded that a mystical experience could be produced chemically by those who sought it, provided that \ldblquote set\rdblquote and \ldblquote setting\rdblquote are appropriate (cf. FB 108). (\ldblquote Set\rdblquote is the character structure and attitudinal predisposition. In this case it means being religiously motivated. By reading books on psychedelic experiences and protocols written by other subjects the divinity students prepared themselves for the drug experience. \ldblquote Setting\rdblquote is the immediate situation; in this case: a Good Friday service.) \par After describing these experiments, Leary raises the question what a religious experience is and gives \i his\i0 definition: \ldblquote The religious experience is the ecstatic, incontrovertibly certain, subjective discovery of answers to seven basic spiritual questions\rdblquote (PE 19). What are these seven basic spiritual questions Leary suggests?\par \pard\fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 1.\tab The ultimate Power question: What is the basic energy underlying the universe?\par 2.\tab The Life Question: What is life? Where and how did it begin? How is it evolving?\par 3.\tab The Human Being Question: Who is man? What is his structure and function?\par 4.\tab The Awareness Question: How does man sense, experience, know?\par 5.\tab The Ego Question: Who am I?\par 6.\tab The Emotional Question: What should I feel about it (life)?\par 7.\tab The Ultimate Escape Question: How do I get out of it (cf. PE 19)?\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par After formulating these questions, Leary explains that the purpose of life is religious discovery, which, for him, means to answer these questions and also experience the answers. However, Leary\rquote s concept of religion, as we will see, is totally different from the rigid hierarchical dogmatic religious systems of Catholicism, Protestantism or any kind of fundamentalism. Leary makes the reader aware that one important fact about these questions is that not only the religions of the world give answers to these questions, the data of natural sciences do so as well. He compares answers given by science with the experiences described by his test subjects and finds striking similarities. Let me give one of Leary\rquote s examples: What is the scientific answer to the first question? Leary explains that Nuclear physicists, for example, suggest that the basic energy underlying the universe is located within the nucleus. \ldblquote The nucleus radiates a powerful electrical field which holds and controls the electrons around it.[...] Objects, which on the macroscopic level seem to be solid, are actually a transparent sphere of emptiness, thinly populated with whirling electrons\rdblquote (PE 22). Leary points out that psychedelic reports often contain phrases which seem to describe similar phenomena, subjectively experienced: \ldblquote I felt open to a total flow, over and around and through my body[...] All objects were dripping, streaming, with white hot light of electricity which flowed in the air [...]\rdblquote (PE 23). He comes to the conclusion that \ldblquote those aspects of the psychedelic experience which subjects report to be ineffable and ecstatically religious involve a direct awareness of the energy process which physicists and biochemists and physiologists and neurologists and psychologists and psychiatrists measure\rdblquote (PE 21).\par Based on this conclusion, Leary builds his theory about human consciousness. The basic assumption of this theory is that consciousness is based on physical structure. Leary sees \i consciousness as a biochemical process\i0 (cf. PE 339). He also equates consciousness with energy: \ldblquote Consciousness is energy received and decoded by structure\rdblquote (PE 342). According to Leary\rquote s theory, there are as many levels of consciousness in the human body as there are anatomical structures to receive and decode energy. Leary suggests that there are seven levels of consciousness. These seven levels correspond to the seven questions. (I will explain the seven levels and their correlation to anatomical structures further below.) And now comes the crucial point in Leary\rquote s theory. Since, according to Leary, consciousness is a biochemical process Leary concludes that the \i key to changing\i0 \i consciousness is also chemical\i0 . He suggests that there are specific drugs to \ldblquote turn on\rdblquote each of the seven levels. Most people would not be capable of reaching the higher levels of consciousness (levels 1-4) and having religious experiences, except with the help of psychedelic drugs. Leary admits that there are other ancient methods, like meditation, which can help us to reach higher levels of consciousness, but \ldblquote at present time, man is so sick, that only a few people can use ancient methods, so that it is safe to say that drugs are the specific, and almost the only, way that the American is ever going to have a religious experience\rdblquote (PE 297). Leary predicts that \ldblquote psychedelics are the future of mankind,\rdblquote that psychedelics will be the religion of the twenty first century and that during the next few hundred years the major activity of man will be the scientific exploration of our consciousness (i.e., our nervous system) with psychedelic drugs (cf. PE 346). In his Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness, he gives his view of how the future of mankind is going to look like. Now, what are these seven levels of consciousness? Which drug \ldblquote turns on\rdblquote which level? And why exactly are most people not capable of reaching the higher levels?\par Before I describe the seven levels, I want to make a short comment on Leary\rquote s style: Leary\rquote s language is very euphoric, agitating, poetic, and transcends standard \ldblquote either/or\rdblquote logic (Eastern Philosophy does so as well). Leary mixes Buddhist and Hinduist metaphors with accurate scientific descriptions of biological, neurological, psychological and physical processes. Another thing that should be mentioned here to avoid confusion is that, according to Leary\rquote s Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness, \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of our nervous system. Leary argues that a certain model of reality is imprinted in our nervous systems in childhood, and this model (or \ldblquote neural program\rdblquote ) determines what we will \ldblquote see\rdblquote and \ldblquote not see.\rdblquote In most people the programs (imprints) they use to process information from the outside world remain the same for their whole life. If we took psychedelics, however, we would be able to suspend imprints, experience other realities (different levels of consciousness) and create our own realities. \par (In \i The Politics of Ecstasy, \i0 Leary does not give very elaborate definitions of the seven levels of consciousness he suggests. In his later works - in the 70s, 80s, and 90s - Leary elaborates on this theory.) \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 2.3. Leary\rquote s model of the Seven Levels of Consciousness\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par This is how Leary describes this model in the texts \ldblquote The Seven Tongues of God\rdblquote and \ldblquote The Molecular Revolution\rdblquote (PE 332-361). (Since in these texts Leary describes the seventh level first I am going to do so as well.)\par \par \pard\qj 1. The Void (level 7):\par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033 This is the lowest level. It is a state of anesthesia which can be produced by narcotics, barbiturates (sleeping pills) and large doses of alcohol. Typical examples for people living on this level of (un-)consciousness are heroin addicts and alcoholics who want to escape the existential pressure of being. Leary notes that he can very well understand these people who want to escape the ego that narrows down our perception and escape all the social games of our society \endash he even calls them \ldblquote deeply religious\rdblquote -, but their attempts to escape the ego are futile because \ldblquote you just can\rquote t keep holding the \lquote off\rquote switch\rdblquote (PE 43). The question (in Leary\rquote s list of seven questions) that corresponds to this level is the Ultimate Escape question: How do I get out of it (life)? Or you could also ask: When does it (life) end? Leary\rquote s answer is that life never ends. Science tells us that life is an ongoing process of being born and dying. According to Leary, it is only during a psychedelic experience that we learn that actually there is no death, there is nothing to fear. Leary suggests that we should \ldblquote go with the flow\rdblquote of life, because stability is an illusion; everything is changing all the time (this concept can be found in Buddhism as well). \par \pard\qj 2. Emotional Stupor (level 6): \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This is the level of consciousness that people are on when they get emotional. Leary\rquote s concept of emotions is a negative one. He writes that, \ldblquote all emotions are based on fear. The emotional person cannot think,[...] is turned off sensually [...] is an inflexible robot gone berserk\rdblquote (PE 38). It should be mentioned here that love, for Leary, is not an emotion. He sees love as a state without emotional greed which is not ego-centered. The answer to \ldblquote How shall I feel about it ?\rdblquote is that you should not get emotional at all. Only if you \ldblquote turn off\rdblquote your emotions can you reach higher levels of consciousness. \par The drug that brings you in an emotional and stubborn state is alcohol.\par \par \pard\qj 3. The State of Ego Consciousness/The Mental-social-symbolic Level (level 5): \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This state of consciousness is dominated by the ego and the mind, the seat of thinking and reasoning. According to Leary, the most important reason why most of us cannot reach higher levels of consciousness is that we cannot escape the narrow \ldblquote reality tunnel\rdblquote of the ego, which is formed by what we have been told by our parents, educational institutions and governmental agencies. The ego is always socially defined. \ldblquote Social reality\rdblquote is a neural program (cf. PE 35). (As I have already mentioned, Leary argues that a certain model of reality is imprinted in our nervous system during childhood which determines how we see the world.) We are told what we are and we accept what we are told. We are conditioned to see, hear, smell, and to behave in a certain way. Psychological censoring-mechanisms (imprinting and conditioning) have made us \ldblquote blind Pavlovian dogs\rdblquote who do whatever our rulers want us to do. We can not use our senses in a free, direct way. We see the world through the categories we have been taught to use. Sensory conditioning has forced us to accept a \ldblquote reality\rdblquote which is \ldblquote a comic-tragic farce illusion\rdblquote (cf. PE 33). \par Who am I? Leary argues that for the average American this question is answered totally in terms of artificial roles (cf. PE 35). Only if we drop out of social roles can we find divinity and discover that the ego is only a fraction of our identity. Leary says that the perspective on this question above comes only when we \ldblquote step off the TV stage set defined by mass-media-social-psychology-adjustment-normality\rdblquote (PE 35). Then we will discover that we exist at every level of energy and every level of consciousness. Who am I? Leary\rquote s answer is that \i you can be whoever you want to be\i0 . With the help of psychedelics you can control your nervous system and \i create your own reality\i0 . Who you are depends on which level of consciousness you are at the moment. For example, if you are at the atomic level (level 1) you can be \ldblquote a galaxy of nuclear-powered atoms[...]the universe[...]God of Light\rdblquote (PE 35). At the cellular level you can be \ldblquote the entire chain of life [...] the key rung of the DNA ladder [...] the now-eye of the 2-billion-year-old uncoiling serpent\rdblquote (ibid.). \par Without psychedelics we cannot go beyond the ego-centred perspectives of human consciousness. The \rdblquote ego drugs\rdblquote coffee, nicotine, and meta-amphetamines (pep pills), which dominate our Western culture, only \ldblquote blow up\rdblquote our egos.\par \par The person who cannot transcend the three levels discussed so far lives in a pretty bleak world. He/she is a victim of his/her parents, educational systems, the government, and of psychological processes in the brain (e.g., conditioning) which he/she cannot control. But as soon as we reach the higher levels of consciousness that Leary defines in his Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness, there is freedom, beauty, ecstasy. \par \par \pard\qj 4. The Sensory Level (level 4):\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\ul\par \ulnone When we transcend the level of the conditioned mind with its symbolic representations of the world, then our senses are opened and we \ldblquote experience afresh the hardly bearable ecstasy of direct energy exploding on our nerve endings\rdblquote (PE 34). On this level of consciousness our perception of the environment transcends the usual limitations of sensory perception. Leary notes that this awakening and controlling of our is the most basic part of every religious method (cf. PE 34). \ldblquote Control means the ability to turn off the mind, ignore the enticing clamor of symbolic seduction and open the senses like flowers, accepting like sunshine the gift of those energies which man\rquote s senses are designed to receive,\rdblquote he explains (PE 34). Leary puts much emphasis on this level of consciousness. (We have to be aware of the fact, that the direct and intense sensual experience \endash the Acid Rock and Jazz music, nature\rquote s beauty, psychedelic artwork, free love - was one of the most important aspects of life for the hippies.) \par The drug that opens our senses to this direct experience is marijuana.\par \par \pard\qj 5. The Somatic (Body) Level (level 3): \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par The question that corresponds to the Somatic Level is \ldblquote What is the human being?\rdblquote . Science defines man as an evolutionary form emerging from animal-mammalian-primate stock characterized by a particular anatomy and physiology. Man\rquote s body contains a complex system of life functions of which he/she normally has no direct experience. (According to Leary, a small dose of marijuana is not sufficient to experience your inner body functions.) A deep psychedelic experience, however, is \ldblquote the sudden confrontation with your body, the shattering resurrection of your body. You are capitulated into the matrix of quadrillions of cells and somatic communication systems. Cellular flow. You are swept down the tunnels and canals of your own waterworks. Visions of microscopic processes [...]\rdblquote (PE 30). You discover that your body is the universe, that you are the universe, because - as Gnostics, Hermetics, and Tantric gurus said \endash what is without is within (cf. ibid.). If you look within yourself you will discover that \ldblquote the kingdom of heaven is within you\rdblquote (ibid.). \par The drugs that trigger off this awareness of your body functions are large doses of hashish, moderate doses of psilocybin, MDA (\ldblquote Ecstasy\rdblquote ), and small doses of LSD.\par \par \pard\qj 6. The Cellular Level (level 2):\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This level leads us one step further into the microscopic world of our body to the biological cell and the DNA - the genetic code. The questions that are answered on this level of consciousness are \ldblquote What is life?\rdblquote and \ldblquote How does life evolve?\rdblquote . Science tells us that the DNA is the blueprint of life which (along with environmental factors) determines evolution. According to Leary, the secrets of your DNA can be revealed to you if you reach this level of consciousness. Leary was convinced that the DNA \ldblquote remembers\rdblquote all the important facts of the evolution of life (cf. PE 28) - of life in the evolutionary sense of the word (phylogenesis: single cell, fish, vertebrates, mammals, etc) as well as of a person\rquote s individual life (ontogenesis: intrauterine events, birth, etc). Everybody can re-experience all these facts; everybody can see what part he/she plays in the evolution of life. Practically all of the test subjects in Leary\rquote s LSD experiments reported evolutionary journeys and experiences of rebirth. \ldblquote It is all there in our nervous systems,\rdblquote Leary says; we just have to become aware of it. Leary points out that he is not the first person who talks about this level of consciousness. He refers us to Buddhist and Hinduist reincarnation theories which describe a similar level of consciousness. \par In order to reach this level of consciousness you have to take a moderate dose of LSD or a large dose of psilocybin or mescaline (cf. PE 344). \par \par \pard\qj 7. The Atomic - Solar Level (level 1): \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This is the highest level which can only be triggered off by high doses of LSD (cf. PE 344). If you are on this level, you are aware of energy transactions among molecular structures inside the cell. You are experiencing the basic energy of the universe (see question 1). More than that (this is where Buddhism comes in), \ldblquote Subjects speak of participating in a merging with pure (i.e., content-free) energy, visual nets, the collapse of external structure into wave patterns, the awareness that everything is a dance of particles, sensing the smallness and fragility of our system, visions of the void [a Buddhist concept], the world ending explosions[...]\rdblquote (PE 24). Leary notes that the metaphors he uses are inadequate to describe the actual experience, but \ldblquote at present we just don\rquote t have a better experiential vocabulary\rdblquote (ibid.). Leary admits that his metaphors may sound farfetched but \rdblquote if God were to permit you a brief voyage into the divine process, let you whirl for a second into the atomic nucleus or spin you out on a light-year trip through the galaxies, how on earth would you describe what you saw when you got back, breathless, to your office\rdblquote (ibid.)? Leary repeatedly uses the terms \ldblquote void\rdblquote or \ldblquote the clear white light\rdblquote to describe this level of consciousness. These terms are adopted from Buddhist philosophy. \par \par Leary admits that the levels of consciousness and the relationships between certain drugs and each level of consciousness he proposed are still hypothetical. However, he seriously encourages scientists to study these relationships. A scientific study would be possible because his hypotheses are cast in operational language (cf. PE 345).\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 2.4. The importance of \ldblquote set\rdblquote and \ldblquote setting\rdblquote \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par As far as the nature of any psychedelic experience triggered by drugs like LSD or psilocybin is concerned, Leary argues that LSD and all the other psychedelics have no standard effects which are purely pharmacological in nature; it is not the drug that produces the transcendent experience. The drug only inhibits conditioned reflexes. The enormous range of experience produced by various chemicals stems from differences in \ldblquote set\rdblquote and \ldblquote setting\rdblquote (cf. Timothy Leary. \i The Psychedelic Experience.\i0 Translated into HTML by Den Walter. 20 Mar. 1998: n. pag. Online. Internet. \cf1\ul http://hyperreal.com/drugs/psychedelics/leary/psychedelic.html\cf0\ulnone , general introduction). (I know that I have already shortly explained these terms, but I want to give a more detailed explanation of them and the concept that lies behind them, because, for me, this concept seems to be the key to Leary\rquote s theory.) \par In the general introduction to \i The Psychedelic Experience \i0 Leary explains set and setting as follows: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 Set denotes the preparation of the individual, including his personality structure and his mood at the time (attitudinal predisposition). Setting is physical (the situation) \endash the weather, the room\rquote s atmosphere; social \endash feelings of persons present towards on another; and cultural \endash prevailing views as to what is real. It is for that reason that manuals or guide-books are necessary. Their purpose is to enable a person to understand the new realities of the expanded consciousness, to serve as road maps for new interior territories which modern science has made accessible (ibid.).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \fs24 During one of his many psychedelic sessions Leary discovered that the drug only acts as a chemical key which \ldblquote opens the mind [and] frees the nervous system of its ordinary patterns and structures\rdblquote (ibid.). The person who takes the drug, not the drug, would be responsible for how the trip is going to turn out. In \i High Priest\i0 , Leary describes this discovery which was disturbing for him: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 There seemed to be equal amounts of God and Devil (or whatever you want to call them) within the nervous system. Psychedelic drugs just open the door to the Magic Theatre, and the stages and dramas you encounter depend on what you are looking for, your state of mind when you begin [...] I began to get a sinking feeling. Psychedelic drugs didn\rquote t seem to solve any problems. They just magnified, mythified, clarified to jewel-like sharpness the basic problem of life and evolution (Leary 1995: 80). \par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 From this discovery Leary concludes that we can \ldblquote design\rdblquote our psychedelic trips, which means that we can actually design our own realities. We only have to create the right set and setting. \par \fs20\par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\fs16\par \par \fs28 2.5. The political and ethical aspects of Leary\rquote s \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy\rdblquote \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par In the 60s, Leary was convinced that psychedelics were necessary for the future evolution of mankind (in the 80s Leary changed his mind). For him, it was no coincidence that LSD was discovered around the time when the bomb was dropped on Hiroshima and the Holocaust happened. The Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness\i \i0 is supposed to show us the way to peace, individual freedom and enlightenment. In the 60s, Leary felt that the limited vision of reality prevailing in modern society and socio-political conflicts were largely due to the dominant ego-drugs, alcohol and coffee. His idea was to change the drugs, and a change of heart would naturally follow. He claimed that \ldblquote politics, religion, economics, social structure are all based on shared states of consciousness. The cause of social conflict is usually neurological. The cure is biochemical\rdblquote (Lee 1992: 79). \par As far as the political and ethical aspects of Leary\rquote s theory on human consciousness are concerned, Leary argues that the changes in peoples\rquote consciousness that psychedelics brought about have made necessary new ethical commandments, and a revision of the Declaration of Independence and the American Constitution. In \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 , he suggests new ethical commandments, a new Declaration of Independence (the \ldblquote Declaration of Evolution\rdblquote ), and a new American Constitution (the \ldblquote The Constitution of Life\rdblquote ). Leary\rquote s \ldblquote Declaration of Evolution\rdblquote and his \ldblquote Constitution of Life\rdblquote focus on his vision of the future of human evolution, that is, the future of human consciousness he describes in the \ldblquote scientific-religious\rdblquote Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness.\par The two new commandments Leary suggests instead of the ten old ones are: \par \pard\fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 1.\tab Thou shalt not alter the consciousness of thy fellow man. \par 2.\tab Thou shalt not prevent thy fellow man from altering his own consciousness (PE 94). \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj These commandments were, so he claims, revealed to him by his nervous system. (I think it is obvious that the message that Leary tries to communicate with these two commandments is: Question authority! Legalize psychedelic drugs!) \par Leary\rquote s \ldblquote Declaration of Evolution\rdblquote (PE 362ff.), which is in many aspects similar to the original Declaration of Independence, is based on three \ldblquote God-given rights\rdblquote (God being Nature and our genetic wisdom): the \ldblquote Freedom to Live, Freedom to Grow, and Freedom to pursue Happiness in their own style\rdblquote (PE 362). In his \ldblquote Declaration of Evolution,\rdblquote Leary encourages the reader to question authority, including his own authority. Leary does not want people to blindly believe in the things he says. \ldblquote Write your own declaration [...] write your own Bible [...] Start your own religion,\rdblquote Leary writes (PE 95f.). In order to be able to start your own religion you would have to \ldblquote Turn On \endash Tune In \endash Drop Out\rdblquote . \ldblquote Turn On\rdblquote means to go within, with the help of psychedelics, meditation or other methods. It means to find a sacrament which \ldblquote returns you to the temple of God,\rdblquote which is your own body, and become sensitive to the many levels of consciousness one can reach. \ldblquote Tune In\rdblquote stands for starting a new sequence of behavior that reflects your vision and for interacting harmoniously with the world you are surrounded by to express your new internal perspectives. \ldblquote Drop Out\rdblquote suggests an active, selective, graceful process of detachment from involuntary and unconscious commitments. \ldblquote Drop Out\rdblquote means self-reliance, a discovery of one\rquote s singularity, a commitment to mobility, choice, and change (cf. FB 253, cf. Leary 1995: 320). In \i The Politics of Ecstasy,\i0 Leary encourages people to quit their jobs, quit school, and not to vote. What he wants to express with his slogan is that psychedelics (especially LSD) create a \ldblquote new consciousness\rdblquote and teach people to reject repressive politics, war, violence, military service, racism, erotic hypocrisy, sexism, established religion (cf. Leary 1995: 8). In \ldblquote Timothy Leary is dead,\rdblquote a documentary about Leary\rquote s life and work, painter Claire Burch recalls what Leary said in an interview in the 60s: \ldblquote He said that it was his mission to introduce LSD to the world \endash and he said it like a general. Even if there are a few [LSD-] victims we still would have to look at the larger picture\rdblquote (Davis 1996).\par Leary has always seen politics as something primitive which has to be transcended. According to Leary, real change is not possible within the system of politics. It is not enough to \ldblquote change the name of the tax-controller and the possessor of the key to the prison cell\rdblquote (Leary 1988: 22) This is why we have to \ldblquote abolish this mammalian push-pull to get on top\rdblquote (ibid.). Leary\rquote s aim has always been to de-politicize young people. \ldblquote People should not be allowed to talk politics,\rdblquote he states, \ldblquote except on all fours\rdblquote (Lee 1992: 166). Revolution would be important but \ldblquote Revolution without Revelation is Tyranny\rdblquote and \ldblquote Revelation without Revolution is Slavery\rdblquote (Leary 1988: 16), as Leary had learned from the teachings of the mystic George Gurdjeff. For Leary, the only revolution that can be successful is a revolution of the mind because the \ldblquote world\rdblquote is a creation of our minds. \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28\par 2.6. Leary\rquote s impact on the young generation of the 60s\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par \par In order to understand Leary\rquote s impact on the youth culture and politics in the 60s we have to be aware that in the 60s the use of psychedelics and politics were strongly linked. Many historians writing about the 60s avoid any discussion of psychedelics without which the 60s, as we know them, would never have occurred. It should be remembered that in the 60s most of the political activism was connected, directly or indirectly, to the ingestion of psychedelics and therefore was shaped by ecstatic states of being. Michael Rossmann, a veteran of the Berkeley Free Speech Movement (this radical left wing student organization arose on the Berkeley campus in the fall of 1964 and protested for civil rights, disarmament, university reform, and so forth) perfectly described this connection between psychedelics and politics when he said: \ldblquote When a young person took his first puff of psychoactive smoke, he also drew in the psychoactive culture as a whole, the entire matrix of law and association surrounding the drug, its induction and transaction. One inhaled a certain way of dressing, talking, acting, certain attitudes. One became a youth criminal [sic] against the state\rdblquote (Lee 1992: 129). Also Peter Stafford, in his \i Psychedelics Encyclopedia\i0 , points out that much of the \ldblquote social experimentation\rdblquote in the 60s - which resulted in a change of American attitudes toward work, toward the police and the military and toward such groups as women and gays - was touched off by the mass use of LSD (cf. Stafford 1992: 54). \par Leary was known to say that his aims were not political. For him, politics were \ldblquote game playing, a bad trip, a bringdown, a bummer.\rdblquote His own definition of the word \i ecstasy\i0 , however, shows that drug induced ecstasy and politics \i are\i0 connected in a certain way and that the ecstatic experience itself is a political subversive act. Leary defines \i ecstasy\i0 as \ldblquote the experience of attaining freedom from limitations, either self-imposed or external\rdblquote (PE 1). He notes that the word \i ex-stasis\i0 (the Greek root of \i ecstasy\i0 ), by definition, is \ldblquote an ongoing on/off process that requires a continual sequence of \lquote dropping out\rquote\rdblquote (ibid.). When many individuals share the ecstatic experience at the same time, they would create a brief-lived counterculture (cf. ibid.). By telling the young generation not to care about politics but to \ldblquote Turn on - Tune in - Drop out\rdblquote instead, Leary contradicts himself. Turning on and dropping out \i are\i0 political acts. If you \ldblquote turn on\rdblquote (which means to take illegal drugs) and \ldblquote drop out\rdblquote (which means to quit your job, quit school, and not to vote), you automatically destroy the existing political and social systems. Leary says that he does not want blind followers and at the same time encourages people to trust him and take LSD because it would solve practically every problem. Leary\rquote s own actions are in contradiction to his first commandment \ldblquote Thou shalt not alter the consciousness of thy fellow man.\rdblquote \par In the 60s, there were many people (Ken Kesey and his Merry Pranksters, Allen Ginsberg, Abbie Hoffman, just to name a few of them) who promoted the use of pschedelic drugs. Still, Leary stands out as the promoter, apologist, and \ldblquote High Priest of psychedelia\rdblquote nonpareil. Theodore Roszak in his book about the 60s counterculture, \i The Making of a Counterculture\i0 , writes that, \ldblquote Surely if we look for the figures who have done the most to push psychedelic experience along the way toward becoming a total and autonomous culture, it is Leary who emerges as the Ultra of the campaign\rdblquote (Roszak 1995: 164).\par What is the difference between Leary and the other promoters of psychedelics? If we compare Leary to novelist Ken Kesey who also \ldblquote turned on\rdblquote a lot of people (see Wolfe 1969), there is one big difference. In contrast to Ken Kesey, whose notorious \ldblquote acid tests\rdblquote were supposed to be only fun and games - Kesey would put LSD in people\rquote s drinks and without knowing that their drinks were laced with LSD people would drink it -, Leary told the young generation that getting turned on was not just a childish game but \ldblquote the sacred rite of a new age\rdblquote (ibid. 166). For Leary, the psychedelic movement was a religious movement. Leary managed to embed the younger generation\rquote s psychedelic fascination in a religious context. For many young people Leary\rquote s ideas were attractive because they were looking for something to believe in anyway and it was considered to be \ldblquote hip\rdblquote to take drugs too. \par Since the moment Leary came out of the academic closet more and more people saw him as a prophet for a better future. Leary was just in time with his LSD campaign because the younger generation was ready to break out of the conservative, materialistic, and complacent world of their parents anyway. When, in 1964, the US got involved in the Vietnam war this was just one more reason for people to join Leary\rquote s side. Who exactly were those people who saw Leary as a prophet for a better future?\par First of all, there were the Beat poets and other artists who lived in communities on both coasts of the US who considered Leary to be a \ldblquote hero of American consciousness.\rdblquote Allen Ginsberg, for example, saw Leary as an antidote to a society dominated by technology which degraded people to robots. For Ginsberg, Leary was one of the few people in our century who kept up the tradition of the \ldblquote new consciousness\rdblquote which, according to Ginsberg, can be traced back through old gnostic texts, visions, artists, and shamans (cf. Leary 1995 Foreword by Ginsberg). Even William Burroughs who initially was skeptical about Leary\rquote s \ldblquote save-the-world antics\rdblquote later came to regard Leary as a \ldblquote true pioneer of human evolution\rdblquote (cf. FB 8). \par After Leary had been dismissed from Harvard, students from various universities throughout the US paid him to give lectures at their universities. Leary\rquote s organizations for spiritual discovery (IFIF, Castilia Foundation, L.S.D.) and also his \ldblquote psychedelic celebrations\rdblquote - featuring re-enactments of the lives of Buddha, Christ, Mohammed and light shows which were designed to produce an \ldblquote acid trip\rdblquote without drugs - were enjoying much success. Various Rock groups, for example the Beatles, were using passages from Leary\rquote s books as lyrics for their songs (cf. Lee 1992: 181). At the first Human Be-In in San Francisco in January 1967 Leary\rquote s speech was the highlight of the afternoon (cf. Lee 1992: 161). Many people of the radical and hip scene that developed in the Haight Ashbury district in San Francisco in the early 60s, the hippies, and even members of the New Left accepted as gospel every word Leary uttered (cf. ibid.). \par Of course, not everybody - especially not the government - was impressed by Leary\rquote s message. Many people accused Leary of spoiling innocent young people and seducing them into taking drugs which would ruin their lives. They felt that it was irresponsible to encourage the youth to use psychedelics and to advocate the legalization of those drugs.\par The US government was against the use of psychedelic drugs in general. The consumption of these drugs was considered to be morally wrong and dangerous to the user as well as society. With the LSD wave came a wave of establishment panic. Suddenly LSD was considered to be more dangerous than heroin (cf. Stafford 1992: 59). Interviews with college presidents, narcotics agents, doctors and other \ldblquote authorities\rdblquote appeared creating an atmosphere of national emergency. Headlines like \ldblquote Warning to LSD users: You may go blind\rdblquote , \ldblquote Mad LSD Slayer\rdblquote , or \ldblquote LSD causes chromosome damage\rdblquote could be found in nearly every newspaper. Bills that made possession of LSD and other psychedelics a felony were introduced into state legislature throughout the nation (cf. Stafford 1992: 58-62). Under President Nixon, a fierce, rhetorical campaign was launched to define drugs as major source of crime in America and to make the war on drugs and crime a national priority. Nixon declared the (ab-)use of drugs a \ldblquote national threat\rdblquote , a threat to personal health and the safety of millions of Americans (cf. Bertram 1996: 4f.). Given these facts, it is not surprising that Nixon called Leary \ldblquote the most dangerous man on the planet\rdblquote \endash nor is it surprising that Leary found himself in prison on drug charges, facing thirty years incarceration for a small amount of marijuana, six months before he wanted to challenge Ronald Reagan in the election to be governor of California, 1970 (cf. PE Editor\rquote s note). This thirty year sentence transformed Leary into the LSD movement\rquote s first martyr. (Of course, Leary appealed the verdict.)\par In \i Psychedelics Encyclopedia\i0 ,\i \i0 Peter Stafford notes that in the 60s the confusion among people about the physical and mental effects of psychedelics was great but their knowledge was not so great (cf. Stafford 1992: 20). Both Leary as well as the US government gave a distorted picture of what the effects of psychedelic drugs really are. Leary wanted everybody to take LSD because his own drug experiments were so successful. The government wanted to ban the use of all psychedelics because they only wanted to see only the dangerous aspect of psychedelic drug use (and politicians felt that they lost their power to rule the country). Neither of the two would admit that psychedelic drugs can have positive as well as negative effects. You might have a revealing experience but psychedelics can also be dangerous to your mental health. Encouraging people to question authority is one thing, encouraging people to take drugs that may ruin their lives is another. \par Since Leary had a large influence over a good many people who took LSD because he promised them that by doing so their dreams would come true, I want to talk at least a little bit about the potential risks of the use of psychedelics, especially LSD. What are those risks?\par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\f1 2.6.1. \ldblquote ACID IS NOT FOR EVERYBODY\rdblquote\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\f0\par We all know LSD-horror-stories, like the one in which an unknowing innocent person takes LSD, becomes depressed, and then commits suicide. Now, is it true that LSD might trigger a serious depression or even suicide attempts? In 1960, Dr. Sidney Cohen (a psychologist attached professionally to UCLA and the Veterans Hospital in Los Angeles) compared forty-four studies on the use of LSD and mescaline/peyote, trying to find out the dangers of psychedelic drug use and psychedelic treatment. He divided the 5000 patients and volunteers who took part in various psychedelic experiments and treatments into two groups: mentally sound volunteers and people who were mentally unstable. Peter Stafford summarizes what Cohen found out:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 Not one case of addiction was reported, nor any deaths from toxic effects. Among those who volunteered for LSD or mescaline experiments, a major or prolonged psychological complication\fs24 \fs20 almost never occurred. In this group, only one instance of a psychotic reaction lasting longer than two days was reported, and there were no suicides. Among the mentally ill, however, prolonged psychotic states were induced in \ldblquote one out of every 550 patients\rdblquote . In this group, \ldblquote one in 830 attempted suicide\rdblquote , and one carried the attempt through (Stafford 1992: 21). \par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj This survey gives the impression that for any person without mental problems there is a very low risk of triggering a psychosis and no risk of suicide involved in taking LSD. However, it has to mentioned that the test subjects had all been informed that they received a drug, they were all - in some way or the other - prepared for the drug experience, and they all had a guide who helped them in case they had a bad trip. \par An example that shows how traumatic uninformed administration of LSD can be, is an incident that happened during an investigation to find out whether and how it was possible to modify an individual\rquote s behavior with LSD carried out by the CIA in 1953. During a private meeting with members of the Army Chemical Corps, Dr. Sidney Gottlieb, who was the head of the investigation, passed around a glass of Cointreau which \endash unknown to the others \endash he had spiked with LSD. Among those who partook from Gottlieb\rquote s glass was Dr. Frank Olson, who after the drug experience became deeply depressed. Reluctantly Olson agreed to enter a mental hospital. The night before the psychological treatment started he died after crashing through a window on the tenth floor of a hotel (cf. Stafford 1992: 47f.). \par If we look at Cohen\rquote s study and Olson\rquote s suicide we can deduce three things: The use of LSD might be dangerous for you: 1. if you have mental problems, 2. if you are not mentally prepared for it or not informed that you took it at all, 3. if there is no guide that can help you to avoid a horror trip which may trigger a psychosis. (Dangerous \ldblquote suicide programs\rdblquote from your subconscious which are normally suppressed might be released during an LSD experience; programs which you cannot control.)\par In the 60s Leary, Ginsberg, Kesey and all the others who wanted to \ldblquote turn on the whole world\rdblquote did not seem to notice that there is a big difference between experienced intellectuals like Aldous Huxley, philosopher Gerald Heard, or psychologist Frank Barron, who took LSD trying to systematically cultivate states of \ldblquote abnormal\rdblquote consciousness, and an inexperienced teenager who takes LSD just because it is considered to be \ldblquote hip,\rdblquote not knowing what to expect at all. Leary thought that LSD was good for everybody just because he and his friends (supposedly) had only positive experiences with it. It was only in the 80s, when Leary realized that psychedelics were \ldblquote not appropriate for democratization, or even socialization.\rdblquote He realized that \ldblquote the Huxley-Heard-Barron elitist position was ethically correct and \fs22 [...] \fs24 the Ginsberg-Leary activism was naively democratic\rdblquote (Stafford 1992: 25). He had to face the fact that not everybody had the genetic and mental prerequisites to profit from an LSD experience. Leary then admitted that his error in 1963 - this was the year when he started his LSD campaign - was \ldblquote to overestimate the effect of psychological set and environmental setting\rdblquote (ibid.). That is why he \ldblquote failed to understand the enormous genetic variation in human neurology\rdblquote (ibid.). In the 80s, he admitted that he had been blind to the potential dangers of LSD because in the course of his experiments there was not one enduring \ldblquote bad trip\rdblquote or \ldblquote scandalous freak out.\rdblquote In his flamboyant style Leary warned people that \ldblquote ACID IS NOT FOR EVERYBODY [...] ONLY THE HEALTHY, HAPPY, WHOLESOME, HANDSOME, HOPEFUL, HUMOROUS [...] SHOULD SEEK THESE EXPERIENCES. THIS ELITISM IS TOTALLY SELF-DETERMINED. UNLESS YOU ARE SELF-CONFIDENT, SELF-DIRECTED, SELF-SELECTED, PLEASE ABSTAIN\rdblquote (Stafford 1992: 28).\par \par Leary never really stopped to encourage people to take psychedelics until the day he died. Although in the 70s his focus shifted from drugs to computers and space migration, he nevertheless continued to give lectures on psychedelic drugs. However, in the 70s, Leary gave up his plan to \ldblquote turn on the whole world,\rdblquote but directed his teachings only to those people who were \ldblquote ready to take the next step in human evolution\rdblquote (cf. NP 90). Leary realized that LSD was not the magic cure-all (for social, political and neurological problems) he had thought it was. He realized that it was time to change and start looking for new methods to help us escape the narrow reality tunnels imposed on us by authorities. It was time to start looking for new methods that could help us to produce the ecstatic experience, that is, the experience of attaining freedom from all limitations.\par As a final comment on this chapter I want to mention that now, in the 90s, LSD is making a comeback and young people, especially people form the \ldblquote techno-rave\rdblquote scene, are re-discovering Leary\rquote s \ldblquote psychedelic guide books\rdblquote from the 60s. The shelves in alternative bookstores in San Francisco and London, for example, are packed with new editions of Leary\rquote s books from the 60s. \par \par \par \par \par \par \pard\lang1031\ul\b\f1\fs28 3. Exo-Psychology (the 70s)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\ulnone\b0\f0\fs24\par \pard\li4440\qj\fs20 Technology governs change in human affairs while culture guards continuity. Hence technology is always disruptive and creates a crisis for culture.\par (Daniel Bell)\par \fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj The Exo-Psychology phase is a transitional stage between Leary\rquote s LSD-phase (the 60s) in which Leary focuses on \ldblquote inner space,\rdblquote and his computer-phase (the 80s and 90s) in which he focuses on cyberspace. The prefix \ldblquote exo\rdblquote in Exo-Psychology indicates that this \ldblquote new branch of science\rdblquote created by Leary has to do with things that are outside of ourselves: outer space. Exo-Psychology, which is also the title of one of Leary\rquote s books, is concerned with space migration. It is the \ldblquote psychology of post-terrestrial existence\rdblquote (Info 1). In the 70s, Leary was convinced that there was a trend in biological evolution on this planet from water, to shoreline, to land, to atmospheric flight. In his Exo-Psychology phase, Leary takes one step away from Eastern Philosophy and a step towards technology (especially computer technology, genetics, and biochemistry). \par Leary describes his Exo-Psychology theory as \ldblquote Science-Fiction, Philosophy of Science, PSY PHY.\rdblquote In order to understand what Leary means with this description let us look how he defines the term \i science fiction\i0 . In the introduction to\i Neurologic\i0 (Leary 1996, first published in 1973),\i \i0 Leary explains that, on the one hand, his theories are \i scientific\i0 because they are based on empirical data from physics, physiology, pharmacology, genetics, behaviorist psychology, and neurology. On the other hand, they are \i fiction\i0 al in a Wittgensteinian sense that all theories and speculations beyond the mathematical propositions of natural science are subjective (cf. Leary 1996: 7). Leary points out that his Exo-Psychology theory does not give \ldblquote final answers\rdblquote but it can give us a lot of pleasure and make us feel free (cf. ibid.).\par In the 70s, Leary had to spent a lot of time in prison. This period of time - when Leary was cut off from society and unable to change the system that kept him in prison - gave him a different, more pessimistic perspective on life. Life on planet earth did not seem to evolve to higher levels of being like Leary had expected. The 60s revolution was over. Leary realized that it was just not enough to \ldblquote look within,\rdblquote \ldblquote return to nature,\rdblquote and assume that \ldblquote all is one\rdblquote ( cf. Info 68f.). In Leary\rquote s opinion the hippies had made an important step in human evolution: They knew how to \ldblquote accept the rapture of direct sensation\rdblquote and lead a hedonic life style; they had learned how to control their nervous systems and how to change social imprints and conditioning. But, according to Leary, the ability to change your imprints is useless if you do not know what to re-imprint. \par In \i Exo-Psychology\i0 , Leary describes the drug culture of the 60s as \ldblquote wingless butterflies\rdblquote who were \ldblquote spaced out\rdblquote , \ldblquote high\rdblquote , but \ldblquote with no place to go\rdblquote (cf. Info 61). What Leary means is that you just cannot go on living in the moment forever. He points out that the hippies had evolved \ldblquote beyond terrestrial attachments\rdblquote and \ldblquote detached themselves from larval symbols\rdblquote but their problem was that they had no direction in life (cf. Info 67). Where should they go? What should they re-imprint into their nervous systems? In his rather disgruntled state of mind Leary wrote that many of the ex-hippies tried to escape this existential vacuum by \ldblquote grasping at any transcendental straw \endash magic, occultism, chanting, witchcraft, telepathy, guru-ism, mystical Christianity [...] the endless variety of oriental charlatanism\rdblquote (Info 68), but it was all in vain because \ldblquote inner space is a dead end\rdblquote (cf. ibid.). According to Leary, the hippies\rquote tragic flaw was that they rejected science and technology. Leary argues that things like psychedelic drugs, the DNA structure, and also new types of technology for space-travel were not discovered by sheer chance. They would show us the way to the next phase in human evolution bringing us one step closer to our final destination, that is, the final destination of life. \par In his Exo-Psychology works, Leary suggests that the course of evolution of life on this planet is predetermined and that practically all scientific discoveries would indicate that the next step in human evolution is space migration. In \i The Intelligence Agents\i0 (1979, 1996), Leary writes that in the course of history the \ldblquote genetic frontier\rdblquote (the best developed culture in terms of technology and intelligence) has moved from the East to the West. East to West means past to future. According to Leary, the East (India, China) was the genetic frontier 3000 years ago. In the sixteenth century, the Enlightenment, Europe was the genetic frontier. In 1976, the West Coast of North America was the genetic frontier (cf. Leary 1996: 177ff.). (Leary calls this area the Sun Belt. The Sun Belt encompasses a crescent of \ldblquote Migrating Higher Intelligence that stretches from Mountain View, California at the Northwest; through Southern California, Arizona and New Mexico; to Cape Canaveral, Florida at the Southwest.\rdblquote ) The West Coast of America would be the last terrestrial frontier; from there we would move to outer space (cf. ibid.). To put it in a nutshell: For Leary, technological innovation means intelligence and independence. West means evolution and change. The \ldblquote genetic runway\rdblquote along which gene-pools \ldblquote accelerate to Escape Velocity\rdblquote runs from East to West.\par Now how is the next phase of human evolution going to look like? What is the aim of life? What is our final destination? How do we get there? In his Exo-Psychology theory, Leary gives answers to these questions. He offers us a model of the evolution of humanity and life in general which is supposed show us the way to a better future and (of course) higher levels of consciousness.\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 3.1. S.M.I.\'b2L.E.\lang1033 to fuse with the Higher Intelligence\lang1031 \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, we have come to a point in human evolution where all the \ldblquote terrestrial goals\rdblquote - the most important of which are bio-survival, territorial expansion, national security, technological efficiency, and \ldblquote consumer-cultural television homogeneity\rdblquote - have more or less been achieved (cf. NP 142\fs26 )\fs24 . At the same time, centralized civilization has produced various technologies which seem to \ldblquote point us upwards away from the heavy pull of gravity.\rdblquote Leary suggests that new developments for space-flight as well as the discovery of psychedelic drugs (which would enable us to experience a world where gravity does not exist, thus preparing us for life in outer space) are an indication that there is a trend in biological evolution on this planet from water, to shoreline, to land, to atmospheric flight (outer space, the \ldblquote new frontier\rdblquote ). In Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, political and cultural phenomena like war, enslavement, or centralization are seen as \ldblquote necessary preludes\rdblquote to the next phase in human evolution which is space migration. \par According to Leary, the nature of human evolution is paradoxical. For example, there is the Centralization Paradox. Although centralization limits our freedom, it would be necessary to link up in centralized collectives if we want to attain \ldblquote the ultimate freedom of space existence\rdblquote and \ldblquote the velocity to escape the planet.\rdblquote Without centralized governments and a \ldblquote diligent, competent, mechanically efficient middle-class\rdblquote we would not be able to mobilize the technologies we need for space migration. The same paradox could be found if we look at the phenomenon of war. Leary explains that wars \endash especially the two World Wars and the Cold War \endash seem absurd \ldblquote until we understand that the genetic purpose of the conflict[s] was to stimulate the development of radar, rocketry, synthetic chemistry, atomic fission, [..] and, most important, computers[...]\rdblquote (NP 141). Leary argues that centralization, wars, and the consumer-cultural TV homogeneity of our post-industrial society are all dead ends. However, they are inevitable steps to get to the next phase in human evolution which is space migration.\par Anyway, why should we migrate to space at all? According to Leary, the main reason for space migration is not overpopulation, or a shortage of energy. In his Exo-Psychology theory, Leary suggests that somewhere in outer space there is a \ldblquote Higher Intelligence\rdblquote which, a long time ago, sent a message to our planet in form of the DNA, the genetic code. He writes, \ldblquote [L]ife was seeded on this womb-planet in form of amino-acid templates designed to be activated by solar radiation and to unfold in a series of genetic molts and metamorphoses\rdblquote (Info 16). Now what does that mean? It means that actually all life forms on our planet are \ldblquote alien immigrants from outer space\rdblquote and that evolution of the various species unfolds according to the same pre-determined plan. According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, life is designed to migrate from the \ldblquote womb-planet\rdblquote (Leary speculates that there might be other unknown womb-planets with life on it), seek this Higher Intelligence, and try to fuse with \ldblquote Hir\rdblquote again. The tactics in order to achieve this final goal would be S.M.I.\'b2L.E., which means \ldblquote space migration\rdblquote (=S.M.), \ldblquote intelligence increase\rdblquote (=I.\'b2), and \ldblquote life extension\rdblquote (=L.E.) (cf. NP 143-45). (This acronym can be found printed several times on every page of every single book that Leary wrote in the 70s to remind the reader of the purpose of life.) Intelligence increase would be a necessary prerequisite for space migration and life extension. Psychedelic drugs would help us to enhance our intelligence, and it would not take long until scientists are able to decipher the genetic (DNA) code and extend our life spans. \par In \ldblquote H.O.M.E.S. A Real Estate Proposal,\rdblquote an essay co-written with cyberneticist George A. Koopman (NP 157-70), Leary suggests the construction of \ldblquote space H.O.M.E.s\rdblquote (High Orbital Mini Earths) as \ldblquote a practical step to explore and activate new resources \endash internal and external to the nervous system\rdblquote (NP 159). These space H.O.M.E.s would \ldblquote open up unexploited territories, new energy sources, and new stimulation for the brain\rdblquote (ibid.). As far as the \ldblquote unexploited\rdblquote territories are concerned, Leary explains that \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 We must not cringe from the word \ldblquote exploitation.\rdblquote At every stage of information/energy the laws of nature seem to require new and more complex engagements of elements to accelerate the evolutionary process. We \b must\b0 exploit every new level of energy in order to build the structures to reach the next cycle. The embryo ruthlessly exploits the supplies of the maternal body. The derogatory flavor of the word \ldblquote exploit\rdblquote has been added by reactionary political groups who wish to slow down the expansion of energy. Rhetoric aside, there has never been an example of a surviving-evolving species which did not \b use all energies\b0 available to it. Nothing can stop the surge towards Space Migration (NP 159). \par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 It should be mentioned here that Leary\rquote s idea of the construction of a space colony that opens up unexploited territories was inspired by Princeton physicist Gerard O\rquote Neill\rquote s book \i The High Frontier\i0 and the L-5 Society (cf. NP 157). In \i The High Frontier\i0 ,\i \i0 O\rquote Neill calls for the establishment of an orbital colony equidistant between the earth and the moon at a gravitationally stable point known as Larange Point 5. In response to O\rquote Neill\rquote s call the L-5 Society was founded (cf. Dery 1996: 36). The members of this society believed that the L-5 colony would help humanity to escape from ecological pollution, resource depletion, poverty, and collectivism (cf. ibid.). The difference between the vision of the L-5 Society and Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory is that the L-5 Society was interested only in the social, ecological, and material implications of space migration, whereas Leary saw space migration as a necessary step towards self-realization, enlightenment, immortality, and \ldblquote fusion with the Higher Intelligence.\rdblquote\par \par In Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, the evolution of life and humanity (past, as well as future) is described in terms of the evolution of the nervous system. Now, how did the human nervous system evolve and how is it structured? Leary assumes that our nervous systems consist of eight \ldblquote potential circuits\rdblquote , or \ldblquote gears\rdblquote , or \ldblquote mini-brains\rdblquote which have evolved in the course of evolution. Leary describes the evolution of the nervous system in his model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness. Before an outline of Leary\rquote s model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness is given, it is necessary to make a short excursion into the field of conditioning psychology. Leary says that if we want to understand his Exo-psychology theory and the model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness we first have to understand the concept of imprinting and that there is a crucial difference between the phenomenon of imprinting and other forms of learning, especially conditioning. (The reader already knows that Leary is interested in the biological phenomenon of \ldblquote neural imprinting\rdblquote very much, and that he thinks that imprints can be suspended and changed by using certain psychoactive chemicals.) \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\par \fs28 3.2. Imprinting and conditioning\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par The understanding of the concepts of \ldblquote imprinting\rdblquote and \ldblquote conditioning\rdblquote and the difference between these two phenomena is the crucial point in Leary\rquote s Exo-psychology theory. Leary uses these concepts to explain the miserable socio-political situation on our planet, and to back his hypothesis that the only way for a \ldblquote domesticated middle-class person\rdblquote to arbitrarily change his or her \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is to apply psychedelic drugs.\par In \i Exo-Psychology\i0 , Leary explains that it is a well known fact in psychology and ethology (the comparative study of animal behavior) that there are certain brief \ldblquote critical periods\rdblquote in a human being\rquote s life during which imprints are made. One of these critical periods is the time soon after a baby or animal is born. If the baby does not develop a basic feeling of trust towards his or her mother during this short \ldblquote critical period\rdblquote - which in Leary\rquote s jargon means that the infant\rquote s first circuit is negatively imprinted to his/her mother - he/she will never be able to develop this basic feeling of trust (see Bio-survival circuit). The same applies to animals. If birds are handled by an experimenter during their first few hours of life, they thereafter react to him/her and to other human beings as they normally would to their parents, and they refect their real parents. During this critical period, which is the first of several critical periods in a person\rquote s life, a basic attitude of trust or distrust is set up which will ever after trigger approach or avoidance (cf. Info 40). \par What is the difference between imprinting and conditioning? The three major forms of conditioning are: Classical conditioning (main exponent: Ivan Pavlov), Instrumental conditioning, and Operant conditioning (main exponent: B. F. Skinner). Leary explains that they are forms of learning which are based on repeated reward and punishment. Imprinting, however, is a form of learning which does not require repetition. \ldblquote The most fascinating aspect of imprinting is this; the original selection of the external stimulus [e.g. mother] which triggers off the pre-designed response [e.g. trust] does not derive from a normal learning process but a short exposure during a brief, specific \lquote critical period\rquote [...]\rdblquote (Info 40). In contrast to all other learning processes, imprinting is immediate and - which is even more important - irreversible. As Leary put it: \ldblquote\i The imprint requires no repeated reward or punishment. The neural fix is permanent. Only bio-chemical shock \i0 [drugs or trauma]\i can loosen the neuro-umbilical lines. The conditioned association, on the contrary, wanes and disappears with lack of repetition\i0 [my italics]\rdblquote (Info 51). To help his readers to get a better understanding of the primary role of the imprint and the secondary role of the conditioned association Leary mentions Ivan Pavlov\rquote s classic study with a dog as an example (everybody knows this experiment): In Pavlov\rquote s study the flow of saliva in the dog\rquote s mouth is an unconditioned, unlearned response. The imprint hooks an unconditioned response (flow of saliva) to an external stimulus, or releaser mechanism (food placed in the dog\rquote s mouth), so that the dog always automatically produces saliva when food is in his mouth. However, the association between the sight of food and the food in the mouth, or between a ringing bell and food, has to be learned by the dog. This is where conditioning comes in. Conditioned stimuli like the ringing bell are associated with the imprinted stimulus which is the food in the dog\rquote s mouth. \par It is important to mention that, according to Leary, \i conditioning cannot change an imprint\i0 . \ldblquote Trying to recondition an imprint with reward-punishment is like dropping a single grain of sand on a forged steel pattern,\rdblquote as Leary expresses it. By applying psychological conditioning techniques we would be able to temporarily change a person\rquote s behavior. However, as soon as the conditioned person is left to his/her own devices he/she would drift back to the \ldblquote magnetism of the imprint\rdblquote and to his/her \ldblquote genetic-robot style\rdblquote which is determined by the DNA (cf. Info 54). Leary argues that psychedelics can help us to \ldblquote recast\rdblquote the different circuits. With psychedelics we can re-imprint new realities and activate new, higher circuits of consciousness. How exactly do the these higher circuits Leary talks about look like? \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\fs28 3.3. The Eight Circuits of Consciousness\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par I have already mentioned that Leary assumes that our nervous systems consist of eight \ldblquote potential circuits\rdblquote , or \ldblquote gears\rdblquote , or \ldblquote mini-brains.\rdblquote Where are these \ldblquote mini-brains\rdblquote located and what is their function? According to Leary, four of these \ldblquote brains\rdblquote are in the left lobe, which is usually active, and are concerned with our terrestrial survival; four are \ldblquote extraterrestrial,\rdblquote reside in the \lquote silent\rquote or inactive right lobe, and are for use in our future evolution (cf. Leary 1988: 88). In his model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness, which is described in his books \i Neuropolitics\i0 (1977a)\i \i0 and\i Exo-Psychology \i0 (1977b), Leary explains how these circuits, or mini-brains, evolved in the course of evolution. Each of these eight circuits corresponds to one of the eight neurological phases in evolution. In Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory the definition of consciousness is the same as in the theory of the Seven Levels of consciousness. Consciousness is defined as \ldblquote energy received by structure\rdblquote (in the human being the structures are the neural circuits and their anatomical connections).\par (The reader will notice that this model of The Eight Circuits of Consciousness is an elaboration of the model of the Seven Levels of Consciousness. Leary reversed the numerical order of the different levels and split up the Mental-social-symbolic Level.)\par \pard\lang1031\fs20\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\fs24\par \pard\qj 1. The Bio-Survival Circuit (trust/distrust):\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par In the essay \ldblquote From Outer World to Inner World to Inner Space to Outer Space\rdblquote (NP 87-99), written together with philosopher and science fiction writer Robert Anton Wilson, Leary explains this circuit, or brain, which can be found in the most primitive life forms and is the first circuit activated in the newborn baby as follows:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 This marine or vegetative brain was the first to evolve (billion years ago) and is the first activated at birth. It programs perception onto an either-or grid divided into nurturing-helpful Things (which it approaches) and noxious-dangerous Things (which it flees, or attacks). The imprinting of this circuit sets up the basic attitude of trust or suspicion which will last for life (NP 88).\par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 When Leary talks about the new born child, in which the first brain is activated, he puts very much emphasis on the process of imprinting (that is why I have explained this process in a rather detailed way). He points out that the first imprinting process, during which a basic attitude of trust or distrust is set up, will ever after trigger approach or avoidance. If the baby does not develop a basic feeling of trust towards his/her mother during the short critical period during which the first imprint is made, he/she will never be able to develop this basic feeling of trust towards her mother and he/she will never be able to fully trust his/her partner(s) and friends in life either. \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\par \pard\qj\lang1033\par \par 2. The Emotional-Territorial Circuit (assertiveness/submissiveness):\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par According to Leary, this second, more advanced \ldblquote bio-computer\rdblquote formed when vertebrates appeared and began to compete for territory (perhaps 500,000,000 B.C.). In the individual, this circuit, which corresponds to a bigger \ldblquote tunnel reality\rdblquote than the reality of Circuit One, is activated when \ldblquote the DNA master-tape triggers the metamorphosis from crawling to walking\rdblquote (cf. NP 88). Leary explains:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 As every parent knows, the toddler is no longer a passive (bio-vegetative) infant but a mammalian politician, full of physical (and emotional) territorial demands, quick to meddle in family business and decision-making. Again the first imprint on this circuit remains constant for life (unless brainwashed) and identifies the stimuli which automatically trigger dominant, aggressive behavior or submissive, cooperative behavior. When we say a person is behaving emotionally, egoistically or \lquote like a two-year-old\rquote , we mean that SHe [sic] is blindly following one of the robot imprints on this circuit (NP 88f.).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\tab\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 In popular speech the second circuit is called \ldblquote ego.\rdblquote The \ldblquote ego\rdblquote is \ldblquote the second circuit mammalian sense of status (importance-unimportance) in the pack or tribe\rdblquote (NP 89). Leary points out that politicians live in a second circuit \ldblquote reality tunnel\rdblquote because their only goals are territorial expansion and control over others.\par \par \pard\qj 3. The Dexterity-Symbolism Circuit (cleverness/clumsiness):\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par Leary writes that this brain was formed when \ldblquote hominoid types began to differentiate from other primate stock\rdblquote (circa 4-5 million years ago). It is activated in the individual when the older child begins \ldblquote handling artifacts and sending/receiving laryngeal signals (human speech units)\rdblquote (NP 89). This circuit discloses the symbolic, conceptual and linguistic world. Leary writes, \ldblquote If the environment is stimulating to the third circuit, the child takes a \lquote bright\rquote imprint and becomes dextrous and articulate; if the environment is made of deliberately stupid people, the child takes a \lquote dump\rquote imprint, i.e. remains more or less at a stage of symbol-blindness\rdblquote (ibid.). This circuit determines our \ldblquote normal modes of artifact-manufacture\rdblquote and conceptual thought. It is made for understanding and using language and thinking logically-scientifically. As Leary puts it, \ldblquote The third brain or \lquote mind\rquote is hooked into human culture and deals with life through a matrix of human made gadgets and human-created symbolism\rdblquote (ibid.).\par According to Leary, it is the Third Brain that created the mechanical civilization which began in the Neolithic and climaxed in Henry Ford\rquote s assembly line. The Third Brain also produced Behaviorist psychology (not Humanistic psychology!), and Newtonian mechanistic \lquote visible\rquote physics (not Einsteinian concepts!). By pointing out the limitations of the Third Brain\rquote s mechanistic-Behavioristic way of thinking, Leary wants to show that a person who lives in a Third Circuit \ldblquote tunnel reality\rdblquote will never be able to understand how to change basic imprints, that is, to change a his/her \ldblquote reality.\rdblquote \par According to Leary, the \ldblquote crowning philosophy of the Third Circuit society\rdblquote is Operant conditioning, or \ldblquote Skinnerism,\rdblquote as Leary calls it (B. F. Skinner is the founder of the school of Operant conditioning). Leary defines Operant conditioning as \ldblquote the final philosophic statement of the puritanical protestant-ethic manipulators who dominated the world for 400 years up to Hiroshima\rdblquote (Info 49). \par Leary defines two main groups of technocrats who are trying to use \ldblquote Third Circuit conditioning techniques\rdblquote to change the behavior of their fellow citizens: \ldblquote Right-wing punitive coercers\rdblquote and \ldblquote liberal rewarders\rdblquote . According to Leary, the attempts of both of these groups of bureaucrats are futile because they attempt to re-condition rather than re-imprint:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 Punitive coercion [the method applied by right-wing punitive coercers] works only as long as the threat remains and thus requires a police state. \par The liberal social psychologists [liberal rewarders] believe that they can change behavior by democratic, supportive, egalitarian education methods. Head-start programs. Peace Corps. [...] Tutoring. Scholarship payments. Insight therapies. Mental health methods. \par These liberal approaches fail to effect change and serve only to support the \ldblquote humanist\rdblquote welfare bureaucracy (Info 51f.).\par \fs24 \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj Leary argues that a regime based on social conditioning can only work if the government psychologists have total control over the citizenry and if the method of conditioning is a government secret. Such a \ldblquote social conditioning regime\rdblquote would not be possible in a democracy where minority groups can campaign against and publicly discuss the techniques being used (cf. Info 53f.). \par \par \pard\qj 4. The Socio-Sexual Circuit\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This circuit determines what in a specific culture is considered to be sexually normal and morally right. Leary describes how it evolved:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 The fourth brain was formed when hominid packs evolved into societies and programmed specific sex-roles for their members (circa 30,000 B. C.). In the individual it is activated at puberty when the DNA signals trigger the glandular release of sexual neurochemicals and the metamorphosis to adulthood begins.[...] The fourth brain, dealing with the transmission of tribal or ethnic culture across generations, introduces the fourth dimension, time \endash binding cultures (NP 89-91).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 As far as sex-roles are concerned, Leary holds that our first sexual experiences imprint a characteristic sex-role which, again, is bio-chemically bonded and remains constant for life (unless brain-washing or chemical re-imprinting is accomplished). The sex role imprinted in a person\rquote s brain does not always coincide with that which is accepted by society. Leary points out that perversions, fetishes, and other eccentric sexual imprints are usually defined as \ldblquote sinful\rdblquote by the local tribe (cf. NP 90).\par \par In most people these four circuits are the only networks of the brain that are activated. Leary notes that this is the reason why their way of thinking is rather inflexible. Their logic follows the primitive either/or binary structures of the four circuits: forward/backward = trust/distrust, up/down = assertiveness/submissiveness, clever/clumsy, good/evil. Leary calls these circuits \ldblquote terrestrial\rdblquote because \ldblquote they have evolved on, and have been shaped by, the gravitational, climatic and energy conditions determining survival and reproduction of gene-pools on a planet like ours.\rdblquote (Leary hypothesizes that there might be more intelligent individuals evolving in space who would definitely develop circuits different from our \ldblquote inflexibly Euclidean\rdblquote ones.) \par According to Leary, each of the first four circuits can be arbitrarily activated by a certain type of drug (first circuit drug: opiates; second circuit drug: alcohol; third circuit drug: coffee, fourth circuit drug: sexual hormones produdced by adolescents in puberty). Leary calls these drugs \ldblquote terrestrial drugs.\rdblquote Leary explains that \i none of these \ldblquote terrestrial drugs\rdblquote can change basic biochemical imprints\i0 . They can only trigger behavioral patterns and thought patterns that were wired into the nervous system during the first stages of imprint vulnerability. \par Let us now look at the four \ldblquote extraterrestrial circuits\rdblquote and the \ldblquote extraterrestrial drugs\rdblquote that can activate them. The extraterrestrial circuits are levels of reality beyond the socially conditioned. Leary notes that the experience of these extraterrestrial circuits/realities normally causes confusion and fear among people who have never before transcended the four basic larval reality-tunnels, because they are not designed to be understood by \ldblquote larval psychology\rdblquote (cf. Info 60). \par What are the four extraterrestrial circuits?\par \par \pard\qj 5. The Neurosomatic Circuit:\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par Leary explains this circuit as follows: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 When this fifth \ldblquote body-brain\rdblquote is activated, flat Euclidiean figure-ground configurations explode multi-dimensionally. Gestalt shift, in McLuhan\rquote s terms, from linear \i visual\i0 \i space\i0 to all-encompassing \i sensory space\i0 . A hedonic turn-on occurs. [...] \par This fifth brain began to appear about 4,000 years ago in the first leisure-class civilization and has been increasing statistically in recent centuries (even before the Drug Revolution), a fact demonstrated by the hedonic art of India, China, Rome and other affluent societies. [...]\par The opening and imprinting of this circuit has been the preoccupation of \ldblquote technicians of the occult\rdblquote \endash Tantric shamans and hatha yogis. While the fifth tunnel-reality can be achieved by sensory deprivation, social isolation, physiological stress or severe shock (ceremonial terror tactics, as practiced by such rascal-gurus as Don Juan Matus [described in Carlos Castaneda\rquote s books] or Aleister Crowley), it has traditionally been reserved to the educated aristocracy of leisure societies who have solved the four terrestrial survival problems.\par About 20,000 years ago, the specific fifth brain neurotransmitter was discovered by shamans [...]. It is, of course, cannabis (NP 90).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 As far as the evolutionary aspect of this circuit is concerned, Leary points out that it is no accident that people who use cannabis (the drug that opens up the Fifth Circuit) refer to their neural states as \ldblquote high\rdblquote or \ldblquote spaced out.\rdblquote For Leary, the transcendence of gravitational, linear, either-or, Euclidean, planetary orientations (circuits 1-4), experienced with the help of cannabis, is part of our neurological preparation for the inevitable migration off our home planet. According to Leary, the West Coast of the US (California, the last terrestrial frontier) is the area with the highest percentage of people living in a Fifth Circuit post-political, hedonistic reality (cf. Leary 1996: 176-79). \par However, this hedonistic level of consciousness is just a transitional stage which prepares us for the next circuit which is exclusively designed for post terrestrial existence.\par \pard\qj\par \par 6. The Neuroelectric-Metaprogramming Circuit:\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par This is the level of consciousness on which the nervous system becomes aware of itself, apart from the \ldblquote gravitational reality-maps\rdblquote (circuits 1-4) and from circuit-five-body-rapture. Leary calls this state of consciousness \ldblquote consciousness of abstracting\rdblquote (a term borrowed from the semanticist Alfred Korzybski), or \ldblquote meta-programming,\rdblquote that is, awareness of programming one\rquote s programming (this term was coined by John Lilly in \i Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Bio-Computer\i0 ). When we activate this circuit we become aware that what we accepted as reality is actually just a program \lquote fed\rquote into our bio-computers (brains). The person who activates this \ldblquote Einsteinian, relativistic\rdblquote circuit realizes that the Euclidian, Newtonian, Aristotelian reality-maps are just three among billions of possible programs or models of experience (cf. NP 93). On this level of consciousness \ldblquote mammalian politics\rdblquote , which have to do power struggles among \ldblquote terrestrial humanity\rdblquote are seen as static and artificial. \par Leary explains that the nervous system is constructed in a way that it is capable of self-reflection. That is why it is capable of understanding and controlling its own functioning. What this means is that everybody can create his/her own realities if he/she knows how the nervous system works. As far as Leary is concerned, it is no longer necessary to describe the opening of this circuit with the paradoxical terms used in Eastern philosophy - \ldblquote Non-Self,\rdblquote \ldblquote No-Mind,\rdblquote or \ldblquote White Light of the Void.\rdblquote The Einstein revolution in physics, discoveries in neurology and pharmacology, and computer linguistics would allow us to describe the Sixth Circuit functioning in operational and functional terms as \i the nervous system metaprogramming the nervous system or serially re-imprinting itself\i0 (cf. NP 94). \par What exactly happens when we access the Neuroelectric Circuit? When the Sixth Circuit is activated, the nervous system \ldblquote real-izes\rdblquote that it is a \ldblquote transceiver\rdblquote (transmitter and receiver) for bio-electric frequencies (electromagnetic signals). Leary says that the use of the Neuroelectric Circuit had to await the development of electronic and atomic technology to provide the language and models that allow us to understand and activate it (cf. Info 112). Only now that we begin to understand and use invisible electromagnetic processes could we learn how to operate our own circuitry.\par The evolutionary function of the Sixth Circuit would be communication \endash not normal (Third Circuit) speech or symbols on paper, but communication on the electromagnetic level, at the speed of light, between two or more \ldblquote contelligences\rdblquote operating at the Sixth Circuit. (Leary uses the term \ldblquote contelligence,\rdblquote a combination of consciousness-intelligence, to describe people who are on a higher level of consciousness.) Since Circuit-Six-communication is electronic, it demands that we are able to use computers. Leary explains that this mode of communication, which will enable us to connect our nervous systems with computers, will be necessary for our interstellar existence: \ldblquote Electro-magnetic-gravitational processes are the meat and potatoes of galactic life. The vibratory-transceiver nature of the brain, useless to the larval [a person who uses only circuits 1-4], is very necessary in space. Telepathy, Brain-computer links. Brain-radio connections\rdblquote (Info 113). \par Leary points out that one of the most important characteristics of Circuit-Six-communication is that it (necessarily) is erotic. Leary explains: \ldblquote [Six-Circuit-communication] is Brain-Intercourse. Electronic sexuality. Reception and transmission of thought waves. The erotics of resonance. The entire universe is gently, rhythmically, joyously vibrating. Cosmic intercourse\rdblquote (NP 121). Only if we take the crucial step from \ldblquote larval earth-life\rdblquote to the next stage (Circuit Six) would we be able to experience what \ldblquote Higher Love\rdblquote means, namely the \ldblquote electronic connection of nervous systems, making love to each other over galactic distances of neurological time [sich einander liebend \'fcber galaktische Distanzen neurologischer Zeit]\rdblquote (translated back into English from the German version of Leary\rquote s \i Neurologic, \i0 which was first published in 1973; Leary 1996: 42). \par Is there a specific drug that can open the Neuroelectric Circuit? Yes, the drug that makes us aware that the things that normally seem to be solid are actually electromagnetic vibrations is LSD. However, Leary warns us that\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 Neuro-electric drugs like LSD are not designed for terrestrial life and are rightly considered dangerous by larval moralists. The Sixth Circuit is designed for extra-terrestrial life \endash and its activation by drugs at the present time is in preparation for migration. Neurophysical drugs \i can \i0 be used by neurologicians to \ldblquote cure\rdblquote ineffective childhood imprints. LSD-type drugs used for treatment or for pre-flight training should be administered by knowledgeable experts who understand the principles of re-imprinting and who have experiential control of their own nervous system. \i The hedonic \ldblquote party\rdblquote use of LSD is a risky business \i0 [my italics]\rdblquote (Info\i \i0 114).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 (This quotation shows that in the 70s Leary apparently realized that LSD is a dangerous drug.)\par \par \pard\qj 7. The Neurogenetic Circuit:\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par By activating the sixth circuit we escape the narrow reality-tunnels of the four terrestrial circuits. However, the sixth circuit does not enable us to receive signals from within the individual neuron where the DNA is located. In order to be able to read the DNA code we would have to activate the Neurogenetic Circuit. Leary believes that the first people who were able to receive signals from the DNA were yogis (Hindus, Sufis, etc) who spoke of re-experiencing past lives, reincarnation, and immortality. According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, the DNA memory contains information about the whole evolution (our past lives as well as the future of evolution). \par What is the function of the DNA? According to Leary, the growth and function of the nervous system as well as the rest of the body is predetermined by the DNA code: \ldblquote DNA designs and constructs the nervous system and maintains supervisory and re-constructive communication with somatic cells and neurons mediated by RNA\rdblquote (Info 120). Leary considers the DNA code to be something which is immortal because it is the only thing that has survived in the long chain of evolution. The goal of life, in Leary\rquote s Exo-psychology theory, is immortality or fusion with the Higher Intelligence. Leary argues that \i immortality is attained through control of the DNA\i0 . Psychedelic drugs like LSD would enable the nervous system to decipher the genetic code. By identifying with this \ldblquote genetic intelligence\rdblquote , which means that we imprint the DNA reality in our nervous system, we would be able to become immortal (cf. Info 122). \par \par \pard\qj 8. The Neuroatomic Circuit:\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj \par The \ldblquote genetic intelligence\rdblquote (seventh circuit) is \ldblquote the immortal, invisible soul that outlives the body,\rdblquote writes Leary. But where does the DNA come from? Who created the DNA? Leary admits that he does not have a final answer to this question. He speculates that the answer to this question could be found if we go further on into the microscopic physical world. In \i Exo-Psycholgy\i0 , he suggests that sub-nuclear events inside each atom determine the elemental processes of life:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 On the basis of the scientific evidence now at hand, the best answer to the Higher Intelligence Creator question comes from the frontiers of nuclear physics and quantum mechanics. The basic energies, the meta-physiological contelligence is probably located within the nucleus of the atom. [...] Physicists are currently studying the sub-nuclear realm to identify the high-velocity particles which make up the language of energy. [...] Exo-psychology seeks to provide the concepts which allow nuclear physicists to \i personalize\i0 sub-nuclear events [by activating the Eighth Circuit] so that they can be experienced\rdblquote (Info 126).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj In order to back his speculations Leary quotes physicist and philosopher Nick Herbert who argues that the sub-atomic world must be \ldblquote non-local\rdblquote , which means that it does not obey the laws of space and time and that in this world the speed of light barrier is transcended (cf. Info 130f.). (The interested reader is referred to \ldblquote Bell\rquote s theorem,\rdblquote a principle of quantum physics, which is used by to back the idea of \ldblquote non-locality\rdblquote (see Capra 1982)).\par In \i Exo-Psychology\i0 , Leary explains that at the Neuroatomic level the basic energies which comprise all structure in the universe are available for management: \ldblquote The metaphysiological contelligence constructs atoms, \i DNA\i0 chains, molecules, neurons; sculpts, designs, architects all forms of matter by manipulating nuclear particles and gravitational force fields\rdblquote (Info 129). The \ldblquote Neuroatomic Contelligence\rdblquote no longer needs bodies, neurons, and DNA designs. It is a \ldblquote metaphysiological brain.\rdblquote According to Leary, this metaphysiological contelligence is the Higher Intelligence (God?) which created life and the DNA. It is the entire \ldblquote cosmic brain\rdblquote (just as the DNA helix is the local brain guiding planetary evolution). It is \ldblquote ourselves-in-the-future\rdblquote (cf. NP 98).\par According to Leary, science (nuclear physics, genetics) and technology (computers, psychedelics, thechnology for space travel) will help us to reach this final stage of evolution, but we have still a long way to go. \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\sl480\slmult1\b\fs28 3.4. Neuropolitics\i : Representative government replaced by an \ldblquote electronic nervous system\rdblquote\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par In Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, in which the evolution of the nervous system from its terrestrial-mechanical stages to its post-terrestrial-individualistic stages is described, technology plays an important role. The function of technology is that it aids our evolution. It helps us to activate the higher circuits of the nervous system. Leary puts much emphasis on the sixth stage of evolution, in which the Neuroelectric Circuit is activated.\par I have already mentioned that the function of the sixth circuit is communication \endash not normal speech or symbols on paper, but communication on the electromagnetic level between two or more people operating at the sixth circuit. According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, electronic-communication technology (telephone, TV, computer networks, etc) can help us to activate the Neuroelectric Circuit.\par In \i Neuropolitics\i0 , we find to interesting essays which deal with the political implications of electronic-communication-techology. The essays are titled \ldblquote The Fall of Representative Government\rdblquote (NP 45f.) and \ldblquote The Return of Individual Sovereignty\rdblquote (NP 47-49) (both written in 1973 when Leary was in prison). In \ldblquote The Fall of Representative Government,\rdblquote Leary, who has always been against governments, argues that with the emergence of electronic-communication-technology any form of representative government (one person is selected to represent others) becomes outmoded. As Leary put it: \ldblquote Representative government as practiced today is a brief and now outmoded historical phase designed to bridge the period between the rise of industrial states and the emergence of globe-linking electrical-electronic communication\rdblquote (NP 45). According to Leary, the process of selecting representatives to govern is a relic of the horse-drawn slave-holding culture which produced the American Constitution. Leary argues that the articles in the American Constitution which set up the mechanics of government are dangerously archaic: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 Senators elected every six years to represent two million people? A president elected every four years to represent 140 million people? This slow, cumbersome system was necessary when it took two weeks for the news to travel from New Orleans to Boston. Representative government by strangers and political party partisanship is outdated. Most Americans have never met their representative \endash indeed do not know his name. Government by law is an unworkable bureaucratic cliche(NP 46).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 \par Leary tries to make us aware that we have all been \ldblquote robot-trained\rdblquote \endash with the help of history books which are self-serving and the print media which are used by political leaders to manipulate us \endash to believe that elective democracy is something sacred. He wants us to realize that the times of centralized governments, when politicians were able to control people with the help of technology, are over. Politicians are no longer be able to keep the methods they apply secret from the people. Technology can be used to reduce individual freedom and to enhance the power of politicians controlling centralized governments, but only if the people do not know the methods applied by authoritarian technocrats. One dissident electronic-media expert, however, would be able to \ldblquote jam the system\rdblquote (cf. NP 47). Leary argues that more and more people are learning to use the electronic media for their personal empowerment. As more and more people are learning to use electronic technology to govern themselves according to the laws of information, competitive politics are dying (cf. NP 49). \par Instead of the \ldblquote outdated and cumbersome\rdblquote American political system in which one president elected every four years represented 140 million people, Leary suggests a new political model: \par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 The political model should be based on the nervous system: 140 billion neurons each hooked to an electric network. Electronic communication makes possible direct participatory democracy. Every citizen has a voting card which he or she inserts in voting machine and central computer registers and harmonize the messages from every component part. Neurological politics eliminates parties, politicians, campaigns, campaign expenditures. The citizen votes like a neuron fires when it has a signal to communicate. The voices of the citizenry continually inform civil service technicians who carry out the will, not of the majority (a vicious and suicidal elevation of the mediocrity) but of each citizen (NP 46).\par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Leary\rquote s model of an \ldblquote electronic nervous system\rdblquote is based on the assumption that every citizen has a personal computer which is connected to a worldwide electronic network (cf. ibid.). This worldwide electronic network in which every individual can express his or her opinion would help us to create a new governmental structure which \ldblquote gets the country alive and laughing again\rdblquote (cf. NP 49). However, Leary does not explain in detail how this governmental system without parties and politicians is supposed to function. \par As far as the idea of a global \ldblquote electronic nervous system\rdblquote is concerned, it has to mentioned that Leary seems to have been influenced by Global Village prophet Marshall McLuhan very much. It was already in the early 60s when McLuhan came up with the idea that electric circuitry is an extension of the human nervous system (McLuhan 1964: 1). This idea is based on the concept that \ldblquote all media [i.e. technologies] are extensions of some human faculty \endash psychic or physical\rdblquote (McLuhan 1967). For example, the photo is an extension of the eye, the wheel an extension of the foot, etc. \ldblquote With electricity [radio, television, computers, etc] we extend our nervous systems globally, instantly interrelating every human experience\rdblquote (ibid.). McLuhan predicted that electronic technology would reshape and restructure patterns of social interdependence and every aspect of our personal lives. By involving us in other people\rquote s actions and thoughts, electronic technology would end psychic, social, economic, and political self-centeredness (cf. ibid.). A new form of \ldblquote politics\rdblquote would be emerging because \ldblquote the living room has become a voting booth\rdblquote (ibid.) \ldblquote In the electric age, when our nervous system is technologically extended to involve us in the whole of mankind and to incorporate the whole of mankind in us, we necessarily participate, in depth, in the consequences of our every action,\rdblquote writes McLuhan in \i Understanding Media\i0 (McLuhan 1964: 4). According to McLuhan, every new medium introduces a change of human perception (focus-shift from one sense to other), association and action. This means that our ways of thinking and perceiving the world are always determined by the medium we use. McLuhan coined the phrase \ldblquote the medium is the message\rdblquote which expresses his idea that it is the medium, not the content, that changes people\rquote s world views.\par Leary does not mention McLuhan in his two essays that deal with the effects that electronic technology has on society and the individual. However, he uses McLuhan\rquote s famous phrase in a slightly different form: \ldblquote The medium is the evolutionary message\rdblquote (NP 49). \par How did people in the 1970s react to Leary\rquote s early projections about computers and networking? His ideas about a global electronic network that connects people throughout the world elicited only ridicule. \ldblquote He was literally laughed off the sets of TV news shows in the 1970s for predicting that most human beings would some day be sending one another \lquote messages through their word processors\rquote and that the world would be linked together through a new \lquote electronic nervous system\rquote ,\rdblquote writes Douglas Rushkoff, writer and friend of Leary\rquote s (Rushkoff, Douglas. E-mail to the author. 11 Sep 1997). As far as Leary\rquote s advocacy for personal computers and the Internet in the 80s and 90s is concerned, many people in the cyber-movement (discussed in the next main chapter) and kids at rave-parties (Leary gave lectures on rave-parties) considered Leary to be only \ldblquote jumping on their bandwagon\rdblquote even though he was one of the first advocates of computers (cf. Rushkoff \ldblquote Loved by Leary.\rdblquote \i Psychedelic Island Views. \i0 Vol. 2, Issue 2, (1996) p. 47.). They did not know that Leary began talking about computers as a means of culture-crossing communication already in the early 70s. (I want to make the reader aware that this was even before Steve Jobs and Steve Wozniak marketed the first personal computer in 1976.)\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 3.5. Better living through technology/ The impact of Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par In the late 70s and early 80s, Leary\rquote s model of the Eight Levels of Consciousness and his vision of a post-terrestrial existence free from all limits (free from social and political limitations, as well as the limits of space, time, and the body) influenced quite a few \ldblquote psychedelic philosophers\rdblquote (discussed below) and a considerable number of young people interested in altered states of consciousness. Many young people in the early 80s, however, were not only interested in the drug-aspect of Leary\rquote s theory. They felt that Leary, by including technology into his vision of the future, helped them to define the new generation they were part of. Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory offered these people who had decided to \ldblquote leave the flower-power 60s behind\rdblquote a new way to live with technology, to make it theirs. In the eyes of these people, Leary resolved the dichotomy between spirituality (the \ldblquote inner quest\rdblquote ) and science/technology (the \ldblquote outer quest\rdblquote ). In \i Exo-Psychology\i0 and \i Neuropolitics\i0 , he shows that technology is not intrinsically evil; it can have a liberating effect as well. In \i The Intelligence Agents\i0 , Leary suggests that we should look westward for change because the East is stagnating. Leary was the one who made young psychedelic trippers and anti-technology-oriented (ex-) hippies aware of the fact that drugs were only a part of the continuing evolution of the human species towards enlightenment, and that the evolutionary purpose of technology was to help us on our \ldblquote spiritual path\rdblquote towards freedom, enlightenment, and immortality. \par As far as psychedelic philosophers who were inspired by Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model are concerned, there are at least two writers that have to be mentioned here: Robert Anton Wilson and Antero Alli. Both of these writers are not mainstream writers. Like Leary\rquote s books, their books could be placed somewhere between science fiction, psychology, sociology, philosophy, New Age and \ldblquote underground.\rdblquote Robert Anton Wilson \endash who was a longtime collaborator with Leary and, like Leary, is a spokesman for the psychedelic culture - talks about Leary\rquote s model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness in several of his books, for example in \i Cosmic Trigger: The Final Secret of the Illuminati \i0 (Wilson 1997, first published in 1977) and \i Quantum Psychology\i0 (Wilson 1996). He even wrote one book, \i Prometheus Rising\i0 (Wilson 1983), that deals exclusively with Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model. By relating it to a great number of theories from the fields of psychology, philosophy, and atomic physics and adding new ideas about how to increase one\rquote s intelligence, Wilson develops Leary\rquote s model further. Leary claims that Robert Anton Wilson has interpreted his theories better than anybody else (cf. Stafford 1992: III-30). Wilson was influenced by Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model very much. Now that Leary is dead Wilson continues to spread Leary\rquote s ideas. At the TRANSCENDANCE-conference in Brithton/England, in 1997, for example, Wilson spent half of his 90-minute talk on explaining Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model. \par \i Angel Tech \endash A modern Shaman\rquote s Guide to Reality Selection\i0 (Alli 1990), written by Anterro Alli, is also based on Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model and offers the reader a great variety of ways to expand one\rquote s consciousness (not only the chemical solution that Leary suggests). The aim of the books I have mentioned in the last two paragraphs is basically the same as Leary\rquote s, namely to enable the individual to create his or her own realities.\par It is hard to say how many young people were influenced by Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model in the 1970s. Of course, there were some of the (ex-)hippies who still read Leary\rquote s books from the 60s. However, from the fact that Leary was not released from prison before 1976 and that his Exo-psychology works did not appear before 1977 it could be concluded that not many people knew what Leary was doing in the early 70s at all. Furthermore, the \ldblquote LSD-boom\rdblquote was over, so there was no need for an LSD-guru any more. But what about the late 70s when Leary went on lecture tours again? In \i Fried Shoes, Cooked Diamonds\i0 (Mystic Fire Video 1978), a documentary on the Beat poets, we can see that there was a considerable number of artists, students and people who were in some way associated with the Beat poets, who read Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology books. After his release from prison Leary spent a lot of time with the Beat poets. Whenever they gave seminars, the \ldblquote Evolutionary Agent\rdblquote Leary was also there lecturing on space migration, intelligence increase, and life extension. \i Fried Shoes, Cooked Diamonds\i0 (Mystic Fire Video 1978) shows one of these seminars with Allen Ginsberg, William Burroughs, Timothy Leary, and other Beat poets. \par In the 80s and 90s, Leary did not talk about his Exo-Psychology theory much any more. However, in the 80s and 90s many young people became interested in this theory because they felt that Leary, by reconciling spirituality with science and technology, helped them to define the new techno-generation they were part of. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary calls these people who grew up using computers to communicate and create their own digital realities \ldblquote cyberpunks,\rdblquote or the \ldblquote New Breed.\rdblquote (I will discuss the general characteristics of this new generation in the last main chapter of this paper.) I now want to talk about two prominent spokespeople of the cyberpunk counterculture who have been influenced by Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology. \par One important spokesman of cyberculture who was inspired by Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory is R. U. Sirius (a.k.a. Ken Gofmann), the cofounder and original editor-in-chief of the first cyberculture magazine \i Mondo 2000, \i0 who has been called \ldblquote a head on the Mt. Rushmore of cyberculture\rdblquote (DD 241). (Since R. U. Sirius will also play an important role in the last main chapter of my paper I want to talk a little bit about his background here.) \par In contrast to most of the people in the psychedelic movement of the 60s and 70s, Sirius has never been a technophobe. According to Sirius, there have always been two strands in the psychedelic counterculture. Sirius explains: \ldblquote A majority strand of people felt overwhelmed by the ugliness of Western civilization and wanted to get as much distance from it as possible. But about ten percent always consisted of \lquote sci-fi\rquote types. For instance, Digger manifestoes of \rquote 67 and \rquote 68 anticipated \lquote machines of loving grace\rquote that would usher in a post-scarcity culture\rdblquote (quoted in Stafford 1992: III \endash 46). In the 70s, Sirius felt that he rather belonged to the sci-fi types than to the technophobes. In a \i Washington Post\i0 interview in 1992, Sirius recalled, \ldblquote We wanted to believe in this cybernetic vision, that the machines would do it for us. And I maintained that vision, somewhere in the back of my head\rdblquote (quoted in Dery 1996: 35). In 1980, Sirius had a revealing LSD-experience which assured him that his intuition was right. This experience caused him to change his life. Cultural critic Mark Dery describes Sirius\rquote \ldblquote metamorphosis\rdblquote :\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 A fateful acid trip in 1980, days after John Lennon\rquote s death, somehow assured him of \ldblquote the all-rightness of everything\rdblquote \endash a revelation that spurred him to leave the sixties behind and catch up with the emerging computer culture around him. Delving into \i Scientific American\i0 , he soon concluded that the Diggers\rquote anarchist utopia of universal leisure and infinite abundance lay within reach; the revolution, if it happened, would be brought about not by political radicals but by the high-tech breakthroughs of capitalist visionaries. But why settle for a cybernetic Eden when the promise of prosthetic godhood lay somewhere over the rainbow? \i Inspired by Timothy Leary\rquote s premonitions in the seventies of \ldblquote space migration\rdblquote to off-world colonies, Sirius incorporated a high-tech take on the human potential movement into his vision of robotopia\i0 [my italics]\rdblquote (ibid.).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 It was Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory that convinced Sirius that technology would not only help us to create a society where work is obsolete and all of us are watched over by \ldblquote machines of loving grace,\rdblquote but also enable us to attain enlightenment, to free ourselves from the limits of space, time, and the body. \par In 1984, Sirius founded a psychedelic magazine that later became \i Mondo 2000\i0 . Subtitled \i A Space Age Newspaper of Psychedelics, Science, Human Potential, Irreverence and Modern Art,\i0 it was called \i High Frontiers\i0 . \i High Frontiers\i0 is a name borrowed from O\rquote Neill\rquote s book \i The High Frontier\i0 , which deals with the construction of a space colony. \i High Frontiers\i0 evolved into \i Reality Hackers\i0 , which evolved into \i Mondo 2000\i0 . In the course of time the magazine became more and more high-tech. The focus of the magazine shifted from the coverage of psychedelics, in \i High Frontiers\i0 , to the coverage of cyberculture, in \i Mondo 2000\i0 . (Leary was one of the contributing editors of this magazine.) In \i Mondo 2000\i0 we find articles about smart drugs (legal drugs that are supposed to enhance your intelligence), virtual reality, cyberpunk, interactive media, aphrodisiacs, artificial life, nanotechnology, brain implants, life extension, etc. \par According to Sirius, now, in the 90s, scientists are developing technologies (e.g., nanotechnology) that help us to understand and \ldblquote real-ize\rdblquote Leary\rquote s Eight Circuit model. In \i Design for Dying\i0 (Leary\rquote s last book which he wrote together with Sirius), Sirius argues that most of Leary\rquote s predictions in his Eight Circuit model about future scientific/technological and cultural developments have actually become true:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 During his later days, he [Leary] didn\rquote t talk about it [the Eight Circuit model] much. I think as he embraced \ldblquote chaos\rdblquote , he wanted to distance himself from the tidiness of the model. After all, did any of us live perfect, smooth, Circuit-Six, psychedelic, yogic lives? Or did we not, occasionally, get drunk[...] But when I think about it, I\rquote m impressed, particularly with how the evolution of the technoculture since the 1970s matches his predictions of future evolution.\par In a clear gelatin capsule: Circuit Six, the neuroelectric circuit, is already a pop culture phenomenon, otherwise known as cyberculture, wired, the Web, the Net, cyberspace, etc. The notion of living in electricity is with us. More important, it surprised our culture by preceding Circuit Seven, the neurogenetic circuit \endash biotechnology as a popular phenomenon, which is just slowly coming into its own. When you hear about garage gene hacking, you\rquote ll know we\rquote ve arrived. And who would have guessed that nanotechnology mainman Eric Drexler would come along and begin mapping Circuit Eight, the neuroatomic level, human empowerment on the molecular/atomic level (Leary 1997: 91)?\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 I think now it becomes clear why in \i Mondo 2000\i0 Leary (along with Global village prophet McLuhan and science fiction writer William Gibson) is portrayed as one of the most important pioneers of cyberspace (see \i Mondo 2000, \i0 issues 1 and 4). In his Exo-Psychology theory Leary laid the ideological foundation for the cyber-movement of the 80s and 90s.\par There is another prominent spokesperson of cyberculture who has been influenced by Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology. His name is Bruce Eisner. Eisner is the founder of a \ldblquote psychedelic-cybernetic organization\rdblquote called Island Foundation and the author of \i Ecstasy: The MDMA Story\i0 . The Island Foundation (see \cf1\ul http://www.island.org\cf0\ulnone ) is an organization of individuals dedicated to the creation of a psychedelic culture. The group is named after English novelist Aldous Huxley\rquote s last novel, \i Island\i0 , about a utopian island, \ldblquote an imaginary place that nurtured and supported the psychedelic vision\rdblquote (ibid.). Island Foundation\rquote s mission is to \ldblquote foster the creation of a new culture based on the visions and ideals catalyzed by the psychedelic experience\rdblquote (ibid.). Island Foundation seeks as its members those who have gained a vision of a more sensible and peaceful way of living together through the use of psychedelic and other min-altering substances, as well as other methods of altering consciousness, like computers and the Internet.\par It was Leary\rquote s \i The Intelligence Agents\i0 (and Huxley\rquote s novel \i Island\i0 ) that inspired Eisner to form the Island Foundation (cf. \cf1\ul http://www.island.org/BRUCE/story.html\cf0\ulnone ). Leary also made Eisner aware of the promising possibilities of computers and the striking similarity between the psychedelic experience, during which one feels that he/she leaves his/her narrow reality tunnel and enters a multi-choice reality labyrinth, and the hypertext universe of the Internet, which gives one the same feeling (Eisner, Bruce. \i Psychedelic Island \i0 Views Vol. 2, Issue 2, 1996: p.4). I think it is worth mentioning here that a psilocybin-trip in October 1977 was the trigger that allowed Eisner to \ldblquote perceive new connections.\rdblquote On this psychedelic trip Eisner realized that Leary was right: \ldblquote East means stagnation. West means evolution and change.\rdblquote Psychedelics and technology can help us to make the world a better place to live in. This discovery lead him to found the Island Foundation (cf. ibid.). (Notice the striking similarity between Eisner\rquote s and Sirius\rquote life-changing experiences. It was the psychedelic experience that changed their lives.)\par The Island Group expresses its opinions and policies in a magazine called \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 , edited by Bruce Eisner. We only have to take a look at the second issue of \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 , which is dedicated to Timothy Leary (this issue was published soon after Leary died),\i \i0 and we see that Leary plays an important role in this organization. This issue features several articles about Leary. Just like R.U. Sirius, Bruce Eisner, who wrote two of these articles, praises Leary as the psychedelic and cybernetic pioneer nonpareil (cf. Eisner, Bruce. \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 . Vol.2, Issue 2, 1996: 5-9). \par As a final comment on this chapter I would like to point out that both \i Mondo 2000\i0 and the Island Group have their origins in California. (The Island Foundation has its headquaters in Santa Cruz; \i Mondo 2000\i0 is based in Berkeley) Why is that so? Is California really the \ldblquote genetic frontier\rdblquote ? \par \par \par \par \par \pard\lang1031\ul\b\f1\fs28 4. \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 (the 80s and 90s)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\ulnone\b0\f0\fs24\par \pard\li4245\qj\fs20 Filtered through the computer matrix, all reality becomes patterns of information: [...] Just as the later Taoists of ancient China made a yin/yang cosmology that encompassed sex, cooking, weather, painting, architecture, martial arts, etc, so too the computer culture interprets all knowable reality as transmissible information.\par (Michael Heim)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \fs24 Since the early 70s Leary has been fascinated by the idea that the brain functions like a computer and that we can change the programs in our \ldblquote bio-computers\rdblquote (brains) if we know the language in which these programs are written (the code). There is one book, written by psychoanalyst and LSD researcher John Lilly, in 1967, which Leary repeatedly mentions in several of his works and which seems to have sparked this fascination with the computer-brain metaphor. This book is titled \i Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Bio-Computer\i0 (Lilly 1967). \par It was not until 1983 that Leary bought his first personal computer and discovered how computers really worked \endash that the language of computers is based on the principle of 0 and 1 (the transistors in a computer can be switched ON or OFF, representing 1 and 0 in the logical sequence). When Leary learned that in a computer every program and every piece of information is stored in zeros and ones and that theoretically any kind of information \endash be it a sound, picture, word, etc \endash can be translated into the digital language of 0 and 1, he felt that a \ldblquote new world\rdblquote with seemingly endless possibilities was revealed to him. Leary called this world the \ldblquote Info world\rdblquote or \ldblquote Quantum world\rdblquote (I will explain the term \ldblquote Quantum world\rdblquote when I talk about Leary\rquote s Quantum-Psychology). He began spending around five hours a day in this new world on the other side of the screen translating his thoughts to digital codes and screen images (cf. CC 3). It did not take long until Leary felt he was able to \ldblquote pilot his brain\rdblquote through the newly discovered \ldblquote digital spaces\rdblquote and that the exercises in translating his thoughts to digital codes actually helped him to understand how his brain works. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary writes that computers taught him that the human mind (i.e., processes in the brain) could be perfectly explained with this principle of 0 and 1, and that computers helped him to control the processes in his brain and create his own digital realities (cf. ibid.).\par Leary discovered that computers were actually very similar to LSD. More than that, in an interview with P. Johnston in 1986, Leary said that the computer is a technology for brain change that is even more effective than LSD: \ldblquote Computers are the most subversive thing I\rquote ve ever done. [...] Computers are more addictive than heroin. [...] People need some way to activate, boot up, and change disks in their minds. In the 60s we needed LSD to expand reality and examine our stereotypes. With computers as our mirrors LSD might not be necessary now\rdblquote (quoted in Bukatman 1993: 139). This discovery led Leary to proclaim that \ldblquote The PC is the LSD of the 90s\rdblquote (CC cover-page). Leary found out that his experiences with this new medium were far from being unique and original but seemed to be part of an enormous cultural metamorphoses. As a result of personal computers, millions of people, especially the young generation, would no longer be satisfied \ldblquote to peer like passive infants through the Terrarium wall [TV screen] into ScreenLand [sic] filled with cyberstars like Bill and Hillary and Boris and Sadam and Madonna and Beavis and Butt-Head\rdblquote (CC 4). People would begin to learn how to \ldblquote enter and navigate in this world behind the screen\rdblquote and avoid television dictatorship. Computers would change the young generation\rquote s appreciation for their own intrinsic worth and ability to alter reality. Leary had a vision of the emergence of a \ldblquote new humanism\rdblquote based on questioning authority, independent thinking, and the empowerment of computers and other technologies. A new global \ldblquote cybernetic culture\rdblquote would be emerging, creating a post-political society based on individual freedom. \par These discoveries had a profound impact on Leary\rquote s theories of the 80s and 90s in which Leary takes his idea of the brain as computer even one step further. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture,\i0 which is a collection of Leary\rquote s most important essays about the effects of computers and drugs on the individual and society, he suggests that the whole universe consists of \ldblquote zeros and ones, bits of off/on information.\rdblquote Matter is \ldblquote frozen information\rdblquote (cf. CC 7). The computer would help the individual to dissolve, or deconstruct, all rigid thought systems/structures (political, social, and philosophical) into zeros and ones, and create new structures/systems with the freed elements - structures that are more fun than the old ones. Furthermore, we would be beginning to \ldblquote understand ourselves as information processes,\rdblquote and in the near future there would be technologies available that allow us to manipulate matter as information, which means that we can exist without our blood-and-flesh bodies and become immortal. Leary tries to back these ideas with a bold interpretation of quantum physics and defines a new branch of science called Quantum Psychology (human thought and behavior described in terms of the language of computers). Quantum Psychology would help us to understand the basic nature of the universe and how our brains operate. However, we would not able to apply the principles of quantum physics without computers, which Leary sees as extensions of our brains which help us to navigate through the meaningless, disordered, chaotic universe and to design ourselves individual realities. As far as the correlation of personal computers and personal freedom is concerned, Leary says that freedom in any country could be measured perfectly by the percentage of personal computers in the hands of individuals (cf. CC 84). \par In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary also presents a theory on the evolution of countercultures from the 50s to the 90s (the Beat Generation, the hippies, etc) and defines a new counterculture - Leary is even talking about a new species which constitutes a new gene pool - called the \ldblquote cyberpunks,\rdblquote or \ldblquote new breed.\rdblquote As far as the political implications of the use of personal computers and electronic media (especially TV and the Internet) is concerned, Leary gives various examples that demonstrate that these new technologies have introduced profound changes in our society. Leary argues that personal computers, TV, and the Internet encouraged young people from all over the world to think for themselves, question authority, and start a freedom revolution which lead to the fall of various political regimes in the late 80s (fall of the Berlin Wall, Czech hard-line regime toppled, etc). According to Leary, this \ldblquote digital freedom revolution\rdblquote is still going on. Leary was very optimistic as far as the liberating effect of electronic technology and the future of this freedom movement is concerned. In the near future we would all find ourselves living in a post-political society that functions according to the cybernetic principles of self-organization \endash a society where the person who automatically obeys and never questions authority will be the \ldblquote problem person\rdblquote and the intelligent person who knows how to live in symbiosis with technology and who thinks for him-/herself (the cyberpunk) will be the norm. Furthermore, we would soon be able to \ldblquote download\rdblquote our mind/brain into a computer, which means that we do not need our bodies to survive any more and that we can become immortal. \par Before I describe the basic principles of Quantum Psychology, I want to shortly comment on the language Leary uses (so the reader will not be confused when I start talking about things like the \ldblquote info-starved tri-brain amphibian\rdblquote ). The language Leary uses in \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 is a mixture of computer-language (e.g. to boot up a computer), psychedelic metaphors (which he uses to describe the experience of cyberspace), and neologisms like \ldblquote tri-brain\rdblquote (which I will explain later), or \ldblquote electronic haiku\rdblquote (movie trailer). \par (Keep in mind that we are dealing here not with a scientific theory based on objective facts, but with a theory that is based on the assumption that \rdblquote the limits of our reality are determined by the limits of our imagination.\rdblquote ) \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 4.1. Quantum Psychology\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , the book that serves as the main source for my description of Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology, consists of texts that were first published in a wide array of publications, ranging from obscure underground \rquote zines to university journals; from New Age/New Edge periodicals (e.g. \i Mondo 2000) \i0 to mainstream Sunday supplements. Roughly speaking, one third of these texts deals with computers, one third with countercultures, and one third with \ldblquote chaos-drugs\rdblquote (psychedelic drugs). Although these texts deal with a variety of topics there is one core theory underlying all of them. Leary calls this theory Quantum Psychology. Basically, it could be said that there are three concepts that constitute the principles of Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory: \par \par \pard{\pntext\f0 1.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart1\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 The philosophy of Chaos: The basic nature of the universe is extreme complexity popularly known as chaos.(4.1.1)\par \pard{\pntext\f0 2.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart2\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 Quantum physics and the \ldblquote user-friendly Quantum universe:\rdblquote The basic elements of the universe are bits or quanta of off/on information. In the Quantum universe everything is continually changing , relative to viewpoint, and dependent on our psychological attitude and info-technology (e.g. computers). Computers help us to make the chaotic universe \ldblquote user-friendly,\rdblquote which means we can digitize, store and create our own realities.(4.1.2)\par \pard{\pntext\f0 3.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart3\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 The info-starved \ldblquote tri-brain amphibian\rdblquote : The brain can be understood as a digital computer that converts every sensory stimulation into \ldblquote quantum realities,\rdblquote into directories and files of 0/1 signals. The info-starved brain requires more and more input of digital data in order to keep growing towards maturity. When the human brain enters a symbiotic relationship with a computer we get the \ldblquote tri-brain\rdblquote : digital brain \endash body matter \endash digital screen.(4.1.3) \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \par \par \pard\keepn\fi-720\li720\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx720\lang1031\f1 4.1.1.\tab The Philosophy of Chaos\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\f0\par In the preface to \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , which is an essay called \ldblquote The Eternal Philosophy of Chaos,\rdblquote Leary gives examples from both eastern philosophies and western science that are supposed to show that the basic nature of the universe is chaos, inexplicable disorder \ldblquote maybe a trillion times too complex to be grasped by the human mind\rdblquote (cf. CC xiii). Leary says that there are be basically two ways of dealing with the chaotic universe that surrounds us: to accept chaos and \ldblquote go with the flow,\rdblquote or to be afraid of chaos and cling to the idea/illusion of stability. Hindus, Buddhists, and Taoists, for example, accept the fact that they live in a world of inexplicable complexity and try to learn how to \ldblquote go with the flow.\rdblquote They belong to the group of people that have realized that you cannot control chaos but you can learn how to \ldblquote surf the waves of chaos\rdblquote and get a lot of fun out of experiencing parts of the chaotic universe (cf. CC xiv).\par The majority of people on our planet, however, are afraid to face chaos. They are afraid to face the fact that safety and order is only an illusion. According to Leary, this fear of chaos explains why for centuries there existed a fanatic taboo against scientific thinking. He points out that \ldblquote Galileo got busted\rdblquote and \ldblquote Bruno got the Vatican microwave\rdblquote for showing that the sun did not circle the earth, just \ldblquote because religious and political chaos-phobes wanted the nice, tidy, comfy universe to cuddle around them\rdblquote (CC xiv). The standard method with which religious and political \ldblquote control freaks\rdblquote would try to tame and domesticate the impossible complexity that surrounds us is to \ldblquote invent a few \lquote tooth-fairy\rquote Gods\rdblquote (the more infantile the better) and to \ldblquote lay down a few childish, simple rules like \lquote Honor you father and your mother\rquote\rdblquote or \ldblquote You passively obey. You pray. You work.\rdblquote (ibid.). According to Leary, scientific thinking and thinking for oneself has always been considered \ldblquote heretical, treasonous, blasphemous, a capital crime, the ultimate nightmare\rdblquote by religious and political fanatics. However, you cannot hide the truth forever. Leary points out that, in the nineteenth and twentieth century, scientists \endash with the help of technical extensions of the human sensorium like telescopes and microscopes - began to specify the \ldblquote truly spooky\rdblquote nature of the complexities around us and within us (e.g., they found out that the brain is a network of hundred billion neurons, each neuron being connected to ten thousand other neurons). According to Leary, among the various scientific theories which have been advanced in the last hundred years there is one theory that changed human life more than any other \endash quantum physics. Leary argues that equations of quantum physics perfectly describe the chaotic universe we live in:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 The universe described by Einstein and the nuclear physicists is alien and terrifying. Chaotic. Quantum physics is quite literally a wild acid trip! It postulates an hallucinatory Alice\endash in-Wonderland universe in which everything is changing. As Heisenberg and Jimmy Hendrix said, \ldblquote Nothing is certain except uncertainty.\rdblquote Matter is energy. Energy is matter at various forms of acceleration. Particles dissolve into waves. There is no up or down in a four-dimensional movie. It all depends on your attitude, i.e. your angle of approach to the real worlds of chaotics (CC 45).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 (Leary does not describe the theories he boldly interprets at all. It is obvious that he does not expect his readers to seriously study nuclear physics.) Leary suggests that, in addition to describing the chaos that surrounds us, quantum physics also presents a couple of startling concepts that help us to understand how our brains operate and what the basic elements of the universe are - which leads us to the next basic concept of Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory. \par \par \pard\keepn\fi-720\li720\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx720\lang1031\f1 4.1.2.\tab Quantum physics and the \ldblquote user-friendly\rdblquote Quantum universe \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\f0 \par Before I present Leary\rquote s bold interpretation of quantum physics, let us look at how Leary defines the term \ldblquote quantum\rdblquote which is the singular of \ldblquote quanta\rdblquote : \ldblquote The word \lquote quantum\rquote refers to a bit, an elemental unit. The word QUANTUM used as an adjective indicates that the subject is defined in terms of numbers, clusters of digitized elements, units of information\rdblquote (Info v). \par Now how does Leary interpret quantum physics? According to Leary, the quantum physicists (Albert Einstein, Werner Heisenberg, Max Planck etc) discovered that we live in a universe made up of bits of information, \ldblquote a universe of elemental off/on digital bits (particles) that swirl in chaotic clouds, occasionally clustering together in geometrically logical temporary configurations\rdblquote (cf. CC 44). In the universe described by the quantum physicists solid Newtonian matter becomes waves or clouds of 0/1, yin/yang, on/off probabilities(cf. CC 45). According to Leary, the equations of quantum physics suggest that solid matter is nothing but \ldblquote frozen information\rdblquote (cf. CC 6). (This means we do not have the body-mind dualism any more; everything is information.) Realities could be explained metaphorically as screens of digitized patterns (cf. Info 2). The universe, according to the equations of quantum physics, would be best described as a \ldblquote digital information processor with subprograms and temporary ROM states, megas called galaxies, maxis called stars, minis called planets, micros called organisms or Macintosh, and nanos called molecules and atoms\rdblquote (CC 44). All of these programs are perpetually in states of evolution, that is, continually \ldblquote running.\rdblquote Furthermore, quantum theory suggests that the behavior of atomic particles, and thus of the universe, is governed by a single programming rule: it is nothing but \ldblquote if-then algorithms\rdblquote (cf. CC 14). Leary explains that the application of quantum physics produced vacuum tubes, transistors, integrated circuits, lasers, radio, television, computers, etc - all the important gadgets that can move around information (cf. CC 6f.). \par Quantum psychology, the \ldblquote new branch of science based on the principles of quantum physics,\rdblquote would allow us to redefine the most important terms of classical metaphysics. For example, Leary suggests that \i a new definition of \ldblquote spiritual\rdblquote could be \ldblquote digital.\rdblquote\i0 If we look at some of the traditional attributes of the word \ldblquote spiritual\rdblquote (mythic, magical, ethereal, incorporeal, intangible, nonmaterial, ideal) we see that this is the exact definition of electronic-digital (cf. CC 5).\par Leary argues that the quantum physicists were explaining ideas that can only be fully understood now, in the electronic-information age. The knowledge that we live in a chaotic universe consisting of digital bits of information \endash Leary calls this universe Quantum universe - is useless for the individual human as long as he/she does not have tools that enable him/her to make that chaotic universe \ldblquote user-friendly.\rdblquote In order to make the Quantum universe user-friendly the individual would need electrical appliances that allow him/her to cruise around in the \ldblquote chaotic post-Newtonian information ocean,\rdblquote to think and communicate in the digital language of light. Leary also calls the digital language of light \ldblquote lingua franca of the universe\rdblquote or \ldblquote binary dialect of the galaxies and atoms\rdblquote (cf. CC 45). Leary points out that, although Einstein and his colleagues developed theories that were to change the world, they were not able to apply their theories to their own lives. They did not have computers that allowed them to digitize, store, create, and communicate their individual realities. In \ldblquote Quantum Jumps, Your Macintosh, and you,\rdblquote Leary explains this paradoxical situation the quantum physicists were in:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 They [the quantum physicists] expressed their unsettling theories in complex equations written on chalkboards with chalk. [...They] thought and communicated with a neolithic tool: chalk marks on the blackboard of the cave. The paradox was this: Einstein and his brilliant colleagues could not experience or operate or communicate at a quantum-electronic level. In a sense they were idiot savants, able to produce equations about chaos and relativity without being able to maintain interpersonal cyberrelationships with others (CC 45).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \fs24 \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj For Leary, the application of the laws of quantum physics has to do with freedom. The universe that quantum physicists describe would open up endless possibilities for the individual. Electrical \ldblquote quantum-appliances,\rdblquote like computers, interactive TV, or virtual reality gear (TV goggles and quadrophonic sound systems to create 3-D computer graphic worlds), would enable us to apply the principles of quantum physics so we can pilot ourselves through the chaotic universe - Leary calls this \ldblquote chaos engineering\rdblquote - and create 3-D digital realities where we can meet with people from the other side of the planet. More than that, the application of quantum physics would allow us to \ldblquote real-ize\rdblquote the realities of our dreams, the limits of which are determined only by the limits of our imagination. This means that we would actually be able to free ourselves from any kind of structure (political, social, personal) that is imposed on us. Information technology would enable us to dissolve existing structures and create new forms, new (virtual) realities with the freed elements. We would be beginning to understand ourselves as information processes, and soon there would be new technologies available that allow us to manipulate matter as information. This would mean that we can finally free ourselves from our heavy, clumsy, mortal bodies and become immortal. \par Now that we are learning to experience what Nils Bohr and Werner Heisenberg could only dream of, it is clear that \ldblquote the great intellectual challenge of the 20\super th\nosupersub century was to produce an inexpensive appliance that would make the chaotic universe \lquote user friendly,\rquote which would allow the individual human to decode, digitize, store, process and reflect the sup-programs which make up his/her personal realities\rdblquote\i \i0 (ibid.). (What is the great challenge of the next century? According to Leary, the great challenge of the 21\super st\nosupersub century is to develop technologies that make the human body immortal and allow us to exist as electronic life-forms on computer networks.) \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\f1\par \par 4.1.3. The info-starved \ldblquote tri-brain amphibian\rdblquote\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\f0\par We already know that since the early 1960s Leary has always been interested in finding out how the human brain operates and how we can use our brains in the most sufficient way. In all of his theories Leary argues that the best way to understand and describe the evolution of the human race is in terms of how well we have learned to operate our brains. In \ldblquote Our Brain\rdblquote (CC 35-39), for example, he suggests that since the 1950s, when people began to use electrical appliances (television, radio), there has been an enormous acceleration of brain power. In just the last ten years new developments in technology, especially computer technology, would have multiplied the ability to use our brains by a thousandfold (!). The best way to understand how efficiently we are using our brains would be to clock it in rpm \endash realities per minute. Now that we have television (hundreds of programs to choose), the internet and other new information technologies, our brains would be operating at a hundred times more rpm than the brains of people living thirty or forty years ago \endash and still we would be hungry for more.\par It should be mentioned here that, according to Leary, historical technological development is following an exponential law. This means that there is a general tendency that there will be more basic breakthroughs (both in scientific and technological applications) in each generation than in the previous generation. Leary argues that this acceleration of technological development is in direct relation to an acceleration in human brain power/intelligence. In other words, although people in the Stone Age had basically the same brain as we have they were by far not as intelligent as we are because they did not have the technologies that helped them to effectively use their brains. On the inside cover of \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , this relationship between technological innovation and human brain power is presented in form of a graph that shows an enormous acceleration of brain power since the 1950s.\par Leary\rquote s explanation for this enormous acceleration of brain power and the brain\rquote s insatiable hunger for more data is an evolutionary one: As our brain evolves, it develops new and more effective vehicles and information-processing devices in order to feed its insatiable hunger for stimulation (television in the 50s, audio tapes in the 60s, personal computers in the 70s, etc). A person with a cybernetic post-industrial brain would no longer be content \ldblquote to watch a tiring two-hour movie, or sit drinking tea and reading the London Times for two hours,\rdblquote like people did in the mechanical age (cf. CC 14). \ldblquote The cybernetic brain expects more data in much less time\rdblquote , Leary explains (ibid.). The cybernetic brain \ldblquote loves overload\rdblquote (ibid.). For the information-age cyberperson the best stuff he/she sees in the movies would be the three-minute trailers with two cuts per second, which Leary calls \ldblquote electronic haikus.\rdblquote Leary argues that the use of electronic technology has elevated us to a new genetic status; a new species, the \ldblquote homo sapiens electronicus,\rdblquote has emerged (cf. CC 45). According to Leary, the growing appetite for digital data can now be recognized as a species need. Leary points out that the brain of the homo sapiens electronicus \ldblquote needs electrons (and psychoactive chemicals) like the body needs oxygen\rdblquote (ibid.). Like any adolescent organ, the human brain would require an enormous, continual supply of chemical and electronic data to keep growing towards maturity\fs20 . \fs24 To illustrate this evolutionary phenomenon Leary describes how his own brain has evolved since he started using computers:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In the last eight years the dendritic metabolism of my information organ (brain) seems to have undergone a dramatic change. My eyes have become two hungry mouths pressed against the Terrarium window [the screen between the material world, the Terrarium, and cyberspace] through which electronic pulses reach the receptive areas of my brain. My brain seems to require a daily input of several billion bytes of digital (light-speed) information.[...My] Personal Computer has changed my brain into an output organ emitting, discharging digital information through the Terrarium window into ScreenLand.\par Just as my heart is programmed to pump blood, my sinewy brain is now to fire ,launch, transmit, beam thoughts through the electronic window into Cyberia [cyberspace](CC 4).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 In this quotation Leary describes his brain as a computer, an organ that processes digital information. Leary\rquote s \ldblquote Info-organ\rdblquote has entered a symbiosis with the digital screen of a computer monitor. \par According to Leary, we were not able to understood how our brains operate before electronic engineers had built computers. The understanding of how the brain works would enable us to construct and inhabit \ldblquote digital auto-realities,\rdblquote which means that we can now chose if we want to spend our days in the material-organic world or in the \ldblquote cyberworld\rdblquote (cyberspace). For Leary, cyberspace is the more interesting one of the two worlds because it offers more freedom than the material world; in cyberspace the limits of time, space, and the body are perceived as meaningless. According to Leary, more and more people are discovering that cyberspace offers more freedom than the material reality. More and more people are learning to use \ldblquote cyberwear\rdblquote (goggles with graphic displays and gloves with sensors that registrate every movement so you can see your \ldblquote hands\rdblquote on the graphic display) to navigate around cyberspace like they use the \ldblquote hardware\rdblquote of their bodies to navigate around the mechanical-material world, and the way they use spaceships and space suits to navigate around the outer space (cf. CC 4). Leary calls people who are able to live in both the material world and in cyberspace \ldblquote tri-brain amphibians.\rdblquote (The word \ldblquote amphibian\rdblquote comes from the Greek \i amphi\i0 (double) and \i bios\i0 (life). It is used to describe a life form that is able to live in two different worlds.) The tri-brain consists of digital brain, body matter, and digital screen (cf. ibid.).\par As far as the (digital) brain is concerned, Leary argues that for the brain (which he sees as a complex \ldblquote bio-computer\rdblquote ) screen-realities are not less real than the \ldblquote material\rdblquote reality. Leary explains why digital realities are perceived by the brain as real: \par \fs20\par \pard\li709\qj All the screen scenes are as real as a kick-in-the-pants as far as our brains are concerned. Our brains have no sense organs and no muscles. [...] To be registered in consciousness, to be \lquote realized,\rquote every sensory stimulation must be deconstructed, minimalized, digitalized. The brain converts every pressure signal from our skins, tickles from our genitals, delectables from our tongues, photons from our eyes, sound waves from our ears, and best of all, electronic buzziness from our screens into quantum realities, into directories and files of 0/1 signals(CC 4).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Body matter, which is the second constituent of the tri-brain, is necessary because the body is equipped with all the sensory input and output ports to bring information into the \ldblquote neurocomputer\rdblquote (cf. CC 35). The third constituent of the tri-brain, the digital screen (i.e. the computer), functions as a door to cyberspace and allow us to construct the digital realities we like. Leary describes how this partnership between human brains and computers evolved by comparing it to the biological phenomenon of symbiosis:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In evolving to more physiological complexity, our bodies formed symbioses with armies of digestive bacteria necessary for survival. In similar fashion, our brains are forming neural electronic symbiotic linkups with solid-state computers. [...] At this point in human evolution, more and more people are developing mutually dependent, interactive relationships with their microsystems. When this happens, there comes a moment when the individual is \ldblquote hooked\rdblquote and cannot imagine living without the continual interchange of electronic signals between the personal [digital] brain and the personal computer (CC 42f.).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 However, the tri-brain amphibian will not neglect his/her body which can offer him/her a lot of pleasure. Leary says that the tri-brain amphibian will not use his/her precious, irreplaceable \ldblquote fleshware\rdblquote (body) to do work that can be done better by assembly-line machines. (For example, \ldblquote [t]he languorous midwestern farmer will don her cybersuit and recline in her hammock in Acapulco operating the automated plough on her Nebraska farm, [and] the Mexican immigrant will recline in his hammock in Acapulco using his cybergear to direct the grape-harvest machines\rdblquote (CC 5).) But when the brain work is done, the amphibian will take off his \ldblquote brain clothing\rdblquote (cybersuits), don body clothes, and enjoy all the pleasures that the body can offer. Leary explains how delightful the experience of the body will be:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 When we platonic migrants sweat, it will be in athletic or sensual pleasure. When we exert elbow grease, it will be in some form of painterly flourish or musical riff. When we operate oil-gulping machines, we will joyride for pleasure. [...] Trains, planes, boats will be used only for pleasure cruising [...] Our bodily postures will thus be graceful and proud, our body movements delightful, slow, sensual, lush, erotic, fleshy, carnal vacations from the accelerated, jazzy cyberrealities of cyberspace, where the brain work is done (ibid.).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 As far as the quality of face-to-face interactions are concerned, Leary says that for tri-brain amphibian flesh encounters will be rare and thrilling. For the near-future tri-brain person, the quality of a personal appearance in flesh will be \ldblquote raised to a level of mythic drama\rdblquote (cf. ibid.).\par To sum up, for the tri-brain person experiencing the body is fun, but he/she just cannot imagine living without computers. Why does he/she need this continual interchange of electronic signals between the brain and the personal computer? Why does he/she form this symbiosis with the computer? The answer is simple: Because he/she wants to be free, free to \ldblquote real-ize\rdblquote the realities of his/her dreams. The tri-brain person feels that in the material world - which stands for bodily robotic work, political tyranny, and spending half of your life in trains, cars, airplanes or waiting in line if you want get information or meet people - he/she can never reach his/her goals. In cyberspace, however, he/she feels free from practically all the structures that limit him/her - free from dogmatic social structures, free from narrow reality-tunnels that are imposed on him/her, free from the limits of time, space, and body. \par \par What, according to Leary, are the social, political and cultural implications of this new way of living in symbiosis with technology? \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 4.2. Countercultures (the Beat Generation, the hippies, the cyberpunks/ the New Breed)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\b0\i0\fs24\par Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory encourages people to use electronic technology (computers, the Internet, etc) for their personal empowerment. In the 90s Leary updated his old catchphrase \ldblquote Turn On, Tune In, Drop Out\rdblquote to \ldblquote Turn On, Boot Up, Jack In.\rdblquote Electronic technology would enable us to free ourselves from dogmatic social structures and create our own cyber-realities (cyberspace). More than that, Leary argues that the use of electronic technology has elevated us to a new genetic status. People who grew up using electronic appliances for thinking and communicating would constitute a new species, which Leary calls the New Breed, or the cyberpunks. Leary writes that the New Breed of the 80s and 90s are people who have learned how to use technology to reach their own private goals and change the world to the better. According to Leary, this New Breed is creating a new post-political cybernetic society which is based on personal freedom and functions according to the cybernetic principles of self-organization and feedback (I will explain these principles later). It would be a society that does not operate on the basis of obedience and conformity to dogma - a society based on individual thinking, scientific know-how, quick exchange of facts around feedback networks, high-tech ingenuity, and front-line creativity (cf. PE 4). Leary notes that the youth revolutions of 1989, which, according to Leary, led to the fall of the Berlin Wall and the resignation of the hard\endash line regimes in Czechoslovakia and Rumania, are signs how powerful this revolution really is. If we analyse these revolutions we see that the ones who rule the media are the ones who control the country. In an essay called \ldblquote The Youth Revolutions of the 20\super th\nosupersub Century\rdblquote Leary gives an impressive example of a young Chinese schoolboy using media technology to confront a powerful tyranny: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 On June 5, 1989, a 19-year old Wang Weilin stood defiantly looking into the barrel of an enormous gun mounted on a tank in Tien An Men Square. He was unarmed. Look at the picture and you see that in his left hand he holds, not a gun or a bomb but his school bookbag and in his right hand his lunch bag. His act was a cybernetic gesture. He and his friends knew that this picture, flashed around the world on TV screens and magazine covers, would be permanently imprinted on the minds of millions (PE 4).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Leary argues that the individual-freedom movement of the late 80s would not have been possible without electronic technology. Thanks to the electronic media, people are able to spread the idea of personal freedom and self-direction across the whole world. According to Leary, the liberation movements in Eastern Europe (in 1989) have their roots in the 50s and 60s in America. Leary points out that the 50s counterculture, the Beat generation, was the first counterculture which broadcast the idea of individual freedom around the world via electronic media, and sparked off a freedom-revolution that is still going on. As Leary put it, \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In the 1950s in America, at the height of the television Cold War, there appeared a group of free people who created highly communicable counterculture memes that were to change history. The beats stood for the ecstatic vision and for individual freedom in revolt against all bureaucratic, closed-minded systems. They saw themselves as citizens of the world [...and ] as heirs to the long tradition of intellectual and artistic individualism that goes beyond national boundaries.\par What made the beats more effective than any dissident-artist group in human history was the timing. Electronic technology made it possible for their bohemian memes, their images, and their sounds to be broadcast at almost the speed of light around the world. [...] The hippie culture of the 1960s and the current liberation movements in Eastern Europe are indebted to the libertarian dissenting of the \lquote fifties counterculture(CC 75). \par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 In the essay \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy: The youth revolutions of the 20\super th\nosupersub century,\rdblquote Leary notes that \ldblquote thanks to the spread of the electronic media, the memes of freedom and self-direction have swept the whole world in less than three decades\rdblquote (PE 4). Like Marshall McLuhan, Leary makes us aware that cultural change involves communication and that the mode of communication determines not just the speed of change but also the nature of change. \ldblquote The medium is the message of cultural evolution,\rdblquote Leary writes and gives his explanation of McLuhan\rquote s famous phrase :\par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 The Ten Commandments, chiseled on stone tablets, created a fundamentalist culture that discouraged change and democratic participation. There is one God, the author-creator, and his words are eternally true. This stone-tablet meme carrier spawns a culture ruled by the inerrant \ldblquote good book\rdblquote and a priesthood of those who preserve, interpret, and enforce the commandments.\par \pard\fi708\qj The printing press mass-disseminates memes that create a factory culture run by managers.\par \pard\li708\qj The electronic, McLuhanesque meme-signals that produced Woodstock nation and the Berlin Wall deconstruction are more a matter of attitude and style.\par The television news has trained us to recognize \ldblquote the robe-memes\rdblquote \endash the feudal pope (or the Iranian mullah) and his solemn piety-reeking priests. We recognize \ldblquote the suits,\rdblquote the adult politicians of the industrial age, with their no-nonsense sobriety. We observe \ldblquote the uniforms,\rdblquote armed, booted, helmeted (CC 72).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 What Leary is saying in the last passage I have just quoted is that television, like a magnifying glass, makes us aware of the ideas and ideologies that are behind the robes, suits, and uniforms of politicians and priests; it would make us recognize how meaningless, foolish, and outdated the ideas that politicians and priests represent really are. Television encourages us not to blindly believe in the things politicians and priests tell us but to think for ourselves. \par Leary points out that the post-war Baby Boom generation was the first generation that grew up with television: \ldblquote From the time they could peer out of the crib the young Baby Boomers of the 50s were exposed to a constant shower of information beaming from screens.\rdblquote According to Leary, television taught the Baby Boomers to be \ldblquote reality consumers.\rdblquote \ldblquote Before they were ten, their brains were processing more realities per day than their grandparents had confronted in a year,\rdblquote Leary explains (CC 78). Leary argues that the media that a child grows up with are of crucial importance because between the ages of three and eight \ldblquote the language circuits of the brain are formatted\rdblquote (this is the period of imprint vulnerability for everything that has to do with language). This means that the media used in the home of the child has an everlasting influence on the way this person thinks and perceives the world (cf. ibid.). \par What happened when the Baby Boomers became teenagers? We all know that they evolved into the hippies of the 60s and started a freedom revolution. Leary describes these teenagers as affluent, self-confident, spoiled consumers, \ldblquote ready to use their television-radio skills to be imprinted by turning on Bob Dylan, tuning in the Beatles, turning off parents songs, and fine-tuning color screens\rdblquote (CC 82). Although their attitude was anti-high-tech, the hippies have used the media and electrically powered music to spread their ideas. When the 60s revolution, the LSD-boom, and the Vietnam war were over the hippies became the Yuppies of the late 70s and 80s. \par However, the revolution was not over yet because the personal computer entered the \lquote game.\rquote Leary argues that the millions of Americans who experienced the awesome potentialities of the brain via LSD certainly paved the way for the computer society we now live in. According to Leary, many of the people who were involved in the development of the personal computer got their inspiration from psychedelic drug experiences. He suggests that without the psychedelic revolution in the 60s, the personal computer would have been unthinkable. \ldblquote It\rquote s well known that most of the creative impulse in the software industry, and indeed much of the hardware [...] derived directly form the sixties consciousness movement,\rdblquote he asserts. \ldblquote [The Apple cofounder] Steve Jobs went to India, took a lot of acid, studied Buddhism, and came back and said that Edison did more to influence the human race than Buddha. And [Microsoft founder Bill] Gates was a big psychedelic person at Harvard. It makes perfect sense to me that if you activate your brain with psychedelic drugs, the only way you can describe it is electronically\rdblquote (quoted in Dery 1996: 28). According to Leary, it is no accident that \ldblquote the term \lquote LSD\rquote was used twice in \i Time\i0 magazine\rquote s cover story about Steve Jobs\rdblquote (CC 42). \par According to Leary, in the early 80s a new generation of young people emerged and continued the freedom revolution of the 60s, using personal computers and the electronic media in a subversive way. Leary points out that this new generation, which grew up creating their own realities with arcade games and personal computers, was the first generation in human history that was able to change electronic patterns on the other side of the screen. Leary believes that this New Breed which, in his opinion, was very much influenced by the ideals of the hippies (individuality, freedom of expression, etc) is responsible for the fall of several repressive political regimes in Europe and Russia in the late 80s and early 90s. By looking at the methods that students in the 60s applied to change the world, the youth in the Soviet Union, Czechoslovakia, East Germany, South Korea, and China have learned how to lead their freedom revolutions. Leary makes us aware that, again, it was the media that played the crucial role in the transmission of the idea of freedom:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 Where did those Chinese students learn these clever methods of grabbing the news screens to express their ideals? Where did they learn the techniques of media savvy to counter the armed forces of the state? From the newsreel films of the American campus protests of the late 1960s, whose ideals are not dead. They were more powerful than ever in China\rquote s Tien An Men Square, as well as in the USSR, where glasnost and perestroika define freedom for the individual (CC 56).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par This quotation shows that, for Leary, the whole youth-revolution boils down to one idea: Freedom for the individual. Drop out of all hierarchical structures and create your own realities. Technology can help the individual to liberate him-/herself from authority. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary calls people who think for themselves, question authority, and create their own realities with the help of computers \ldblquote cyberpunks.\rdblquote Since there is a long history behind the term \ldblquote cyberpunk\rdblquote I want to take a closer look at it. Who exactly is the cyberpunk? Where does the term come from?\par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\f1 4.2.1. The cyberpunk\par \pard\lang1031\f0\par \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033 In 1984, when William Gibson\rquote s novel \i Neuromancer\i0 came out, a new genre in Science Fiction was born \endash cyberpunk. In the introduction to this paper I have already explained that cyberpunk escaped from being a literary genre into cultural reality, and that the media, inspired by the street-hardened characters and the new world (cyberspace) created in Gibson\rquote s books, started to call adolescent computer hackers \ldblquote cyberpunks.\rdblquote\par Now how does Leary define the term \ldblquote cyberpunk\rdblquote ? According to Leary, there is a whole philosophy and a long history behind this term. Leary says that, in order to understand what the word \ldblquote cyberpunk,\rdblquote or \ldblquote cyber-person\rdblquote really means, we have to go back to the Greek roots of the term \ldblquote cybernetics\rdblquote . Leary explains that the term \ldblquote cybernetics\rdblquote comes from the Greek word \ldblquote kubernetes\rdblquote which means \ldblquote pilot\rdblquote or \ldblquote steersman\rdblquote (cf. CC 64). The Hellenic origin of this word is important in that it reflects the Socratic-Platonic traditions of independence and individual self-reliance which, according to Leary, derived from the geographical situation in Greece. In the following quotation Leary explains how the geographical situation in Greece encouraged people to be self-reliant:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 The proud little Greek city-states were perched on peninsular fingers wiggling down in the fertile Mediterranean Sea [...] \par Mariners of these ancient days had to be bold and resourceful. Sailing the seven seas without maps or navigational equipment, they were forced to develop independence of thought. The self-reliance that these Hellenic pilots developed in their voyages probably carried over to the democratic, inquiring, questioning nature of their land life.\par The Athenian cyberpunks, the pilots made their own navigational decisions.\par These psychogeographical factors may have contributed to the humanism of the Hellenic religions that emphasized freedom, pagan joy, celebration of life, and speculative thought (CC 64).\par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 But then the Romans took over and translated the word \ldblquote kubernetes\rdblquote to \ldblquote gubernetes\rdblquote (with the verb form \ldblquote gubernare\rdblquote ). The Greek word for pilot became the Latin word for governor, \ldblquote to steer\rdblquote became \ldblquote to control.\rdblquote In Leary\rquote s opinion the word \ldblquote governor\rdblquote expresses an attitude of \ldblquote obedience-control in relationship to self and others\rdblquote (CC 66). What Leary wants to show with this etymological analysis is that by translating the word \ldblquote kubernetes\rdblquote to \ldblquote gubernetes\rdblquote the aspect of self-reliance got lost, and that this translation was a semantic manipulation which had a profound impact on how people who used this word thought and behaved. The term \ldblquote governor\rdblquote encourages people to think in terms of obedience and control rather than independence and self-reliance. According to Leary, semantic manipulations are quite relevant to the pragmatics of the culture surrounding their usage. Leary quotes French philosopher Michel Foucault who said that\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 human consciousness \endash as expressed in speech and images, in self-definition and mutual designation...is the authentic locale of the determinant politics of being. ... What men and women are born into is only superficially this or that social, legislative, and executive system. Their ambiguous, oppressive birthright is the language, the conceptual categories, the conventions of identification and perception which have evolved and, very largely, atrophied up to the time of their personal and social existence. It is the established but customarily subconscious, unargued constraints of awareness that enslave (CC 65).\par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 With this quotation Leary wants to make us aware that \ldblquote to remove the means of expressing dissent is to remove the possibility of dissent.\rdblquote Leary notes that Marshall McLuhan would agree: \ldblquote If you change the language, you change society.\rdblquote\par As far as the term \ldblquote cybernetics\rdblquote is concerned, Leary says that now (in the computer age\fs26 )\fs24 that all hierarchical structures in society are dissolving we are returning to the original meaning of \ldblquote cyber.\rdblquote People would create new words that express the self-reliance that got lost. As Leary puts it, \ldblquote The terms \lquote cybernetic person\rquote or \lquote cybernaut\rquote [terms used to describe the person acting in cyberspace] return us to the original meaning of \lquote pilot\rquote and puts [sic] the self-reliant person back in the loop. These words (and the more pop term \lquote cyberpunk\rquote ) refer to the personalization (and thus the popularization) of knowledge-information technology, to innovative thinking on the part of the individual\rdblquote (CC 67). Leary describes the cyberpunk as follows:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 [A cyberpunk is a] resourceful, skillful individual who accesses and steers knowledge-communication technology toward his/her own private goals, for personal pleasure, profit, principle, or growth\rdblquote (ibid.).\par Cyberpunks are the inventors, innovative writers, technofrontier artists, risk-taking film directors, icon-shifting composers,[...] free-agent scientists, technocreatives, computer visionaries, elegant hackers, [...] neurological test pilots, media explorers \endash all of those who boldly package and steer ideas out there where no thoughts have gone before (ibid.).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 According to Leary, \i the cyberpunk is a person who uses all available data-input to think for him-/herself and questions authority\i0 . He/she is a person who is able to apply the principles of quantum physics, a person who creates his/her own realities. Leary created the cyberpunk code \ldblquote Think for yourself; question authority\rdblquote (CC 69).\par As far as the ethical aspect of the cyberpunk-way-of-living is concerned, Leary emphasizes that the cyberpunk performs no act of physical violence (cf. ibid.). However, the cyberpunk believes in freedom of information and is willing to go any length to free information, including breaking the law. (\ldblquote Sticks and stones may break your bones, but information can never hurt you,\rdblquote Leary says.) The cyberpunk seeks independence, not control over others (cf. ibid.). Now it becomes clear what puts the \ldblquote punk\rdblquote in \ldblquote cyberpunk.\rdblquote It is the idea of anarchy, rebelliousness, and liberation through technology. \par Leary also describes the cyberpunk as modern alchemist and shows that the parallels between the alchemists of the Middle Ages and the cyberpunk computer adepts are be numerous:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 Alchemists of the Middle Ages described the construction of magical appliances for viewing future events, or speaking to friends distant or dead. Paracelsus described the construction of a mirror of \i electrum magicum\i0 with such properties [...]\par Today, modern alchemists have at their command tools of clarity and power unimagined by their predecessors. Computer screens are magical mirrors, presenting alternate realities at varying degrees of abstraction on command (invocation). Nineteenth-century occult legend Aleister Crowley defines magick \endash with a \i k\i0 [Crowley\rquote s spelling] - as \ldblquote the art and science of causing change to occur in conformity to our will.\rdblquote To this end, the computer is the latter-day lever of Archimedes with which we can move the world (DD 45).\par \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Furthermore, both alchemists of the middle ages and cyberpunks employ knowledge of an arcanum unknown to the population at large, with secret symbols and words of power. Leary explains: \ldblquote The \lquote secret symbols\rquote comprise the language of computers and mathematics, and the \lquote words of power\rquote instruct the computer operating system to compete awesome tasks\rdblquote (DD 46). Leary compares the four elements the alchemists believed in (earth, air, fire, and water) with the Tarot\rquote s four suits (wands, cups, swords, and pentacles or disks) with four essential parts of the computer: mouse, RAM chips, electricity, and the disk drives(cf. DD 46f.). \par In the essay \ldblquote The cyberpunk: The individual as reality pilot\rdblquote (CC 62-70) Leary gives examples of cyberpunks from different periods of history. Some of the most important cyberpunks that Leary mentions are Prometheus, \ldblquote a technological genius who \lquote stole\rquote fire from the Gods and gave it to humanity\rdblquote (CC 63), Christoph Columbus who was unsurpassed in charting and finding his way about the unknown seas (cf. CC 68), Andy Warhol, William Gibson, Stanley Kubrik, Steve Jobs, and Steve Wozniak. By giving these examples Leary tries to show that the tradition of the individual who thinks for him-/herself extends to the beginning of recorded history. He reminds us that the very label of our species, Homo sapiens, defines us as \ldblquote the animals who think\rdblquote (cf. CC 69). \ldblquote If our genetic function is \i computare\i0 (\ldblquote to think\rdblquote ),\rdblquote Leary hypothesizes, \ldblquote then it follows that the ages and stages of human history, so far, have been larval or preparatory. After the insectoid phases of submission to gene pools, the mature stage of the human life is the individual who thinks for him/herself\rdblquote (CC 69). \par In Leary\rquote s view we are coming closer and closer to this mature stage of human life. Leary predicts the emergence of a New (Digital) Humanism with an emphasis on independent thinking, individual creativity, and the empowerment of computers and other technologies. The various new electronic technologies that more and more people have access to - modern synthesizers, computers, Internet, etc - would help us to get closer to people and understand ourselves better. They would encourage us to \ldblquote do our own thing\rdblquote and help us to access the information we need to realize ourselves, which means that we do not need authorities that tell us what to do any more. Due to the de-centralizing effect of computers and the Internet the mature stage of the human life cycle would soon be reached. Leary predicts that in the cyber society of the 21\super st\nosupersub century the cyberpunk will be the norm: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 In the information-communication civilization of the 21\super st\nosupersub Century, creativity and mental excellence will be the ethical norm. The world will be too dynamic, complex, diversified, too cross-linked by global immediacies of modern (quantum) communication, for stability of thought or dependability of behavior to be successful. The \ldblquote good person\rdblquote in the cybernetic society are the intelligent ones who think for themselves. The \ldblquote problem person\rdblquote in the cybernetic society of the 21\super st\nosupersub Century is the one who automatically obeys, who never questions authority, who acts to protect his/her official status, who placates and politics [sic] rather than thinks independently (CC 63).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj As more and more individuals are liberating themselves from the bondage of authoritarian hierarchical management structures, freeing themselves to interact with the world supported by their wits rather than traditional social rules, \i cybernetic principles of organization\i0 would emerge within the social system and transform the conventional social structure into \ldblquote a fabric whose weave is defined by the sum of interactions of autonomous entities\rdblquote (cf. CC 51). This means that there will soon be no central government that imposes rigid rules on individuals any more. Democracy \endash no matter if it is a \ldblquote capitalist democracy\rdblquote or a \ldblquote socialist democracy\rdblquote - would be a system of government that is obsolete in the cybernetic age. \ldblquote In the cybernetic age, \lquote democracy\rquote becomes majority mob-rule and the enemy of individual freedom,\rdblquote Leary explains (CC 72). But would there not be total chaos if there is no central authority that has the power to create law and order, and everybody does whatever he/she wants to do? No. Contrary to the belief that a society that is not based on an authoritarian hierarchical system is nothing but total chaos (disorder), Leary is of the opinion that organizational principles that produce order will arise and create a \ldblquote self-organizing system\rdblquote without central government: the \ldblquote cyber-society.\rdblquote What exactly are these cybernetic principles of organization Leary is talking about? How can order arise from chaos? How exactly does Leary picture this social fabric whose weave is defined by the sum of interactions of autonomous individuals? \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\f1 4.2.2. The organizational principles of the \ldblquote cyber-society\rdblquote\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\f0\par In order to be able to understand the arguments Leary uses to back his idea of a cyber-society the reader has to have some background knowledge about cybernetics. Since Leary\rquote s explanations of cybernetics are rather short I will first explain the basic concepts of cybernetics and then present Leary\rquote s arguments.\par Cybernetics is the study of control and communication processes in living and artificial systems. The cyberneticists - who were mathematicians, neuroscientists, social scientists and engineers - were concerned with describing patterns of communication and control that underlie electronic, mechanical, and biological systems. They clearly distinguished the patterns of organization of a system from its physical structure. This is an important distinction because it allowed them to define patterns of organization (organizational principles) that do not only apply to one particular system, but to all systems, irrespective of their nature (cf. Capra 1997: 51f.).\par All the major achievements of cybernetics originated in comparisons between organisms (living systems) and machines (artificial systems). While studying the mechanisms of self-regulating machines like the thermostat, or the steam engine, the cyberneticists made an important discovery. Although self-regulating machines had existed long before cybernetics, the cyberneticists were the first ones who recognized that these machines involved a mechanism which Norbert Wiener called \ldblquote feedback loop.\rdblquote Fritiof Capra explains the concept of feedback as follows: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 A feedback loop is a circular arrangement of causally connected elements, in which an initial cause propagates around the links of the loop, so that each element has an effect on the next, until the last \ldblquote feeds back\rdblquote the effect into the first element of the cycle [...]. The consequence of this arrangement is that the first link (\ldblquote input\rdblquote ) is affected by the last (\ldblquote output\rdblquote ), which results in self-regulation of the entire system, as the initial effect is modified each time it travels around the cycle (Capra 1997: 56f.). \par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Wiener called the logical pattern, or organizational principle, that underlies the concept of feedback \ldblquote circular causality\rdblquote (cf. Capra 1997: 58). The cyberneticists found out that circular causality cannot only be found in self-regulating machines but that this organizational principle is actually an essential property of all living systems (organisms and social systems) as well. The conditions necessary for a living system to exist are created and maintained by the system itself in a self-sustaining process of dynamical feedback (cf. Capra 1997: 62).\par Leary was fascinated by the fact that feedback can create a system that regulates itself and does not need an outside force to control it. Being a person who is against centralism, he was very much interested in the decentralizing effect that feedback might have on the information society we live in. He was convinced that the feedback created by people communicating via the Internet, interactive media, etc, was going to change the world to the better. As more and more people become connected, more feedback could occur and create a living system that does not depend on rigid structures of control and domination in order to exist. \par Now how does Leary explain the basic concepts of cybernetics? After making the reader aware of the difference between a pattern of organization/organizational principle and the structure of a system, Leary points out that the most important organizational principle defined by cybernetics is the circular causality of feedback, \rdblquote a notion crucial to the understanding of the complexities of the modern world\rdblquote (DD 50). He explains the concept of feedback by describing how perception in human beings works: \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 Feedback is information about a process used to change that process. One remarkable fact about neurophysiology is that nerve signals don\rquote t carry explicitly encoded information. A nerve fiber carries signals to the brain. It is the brain that somehow manufactures the richness of our perceptual experience from these signals. Only by correlating the input signals with the internal state of the perceptual apparatus can sense be made of the signals. Changes of sensation are correlated with motor activity. Here is our circularity again: movements are required for perception, and perception required for movements. Even seemingly simple muscular acts couldn\rquote t be accomplished without feedback (DD 50).\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 The system that Leary describes here regulates itself, like a thermostat which regulates itself by continuous feedback. Leary explains that in any self-regulating system all the components are active. As Leary puts it, \ldblquote cybernetic systems are self-organizing. This implies an active cooperation of the individual components of any population that composes a system\rdblquote (DD 51). Leary explains that cybernetics terms this principle of self-organization \ldblquote autopoiesis,\rdblquote from the Greek \i auto\i0 , meaning \ldblquote self,\rdblquote and \i poiesis, \i0 meaning\i \ldblquote a making\rdblquote \i0 (cf. ibid.). \ldblquote Autopoiesis refers to the central circular quality of all living and lifelike systems,\rdblquote Leary writes. \ldblquote The principal characteristic of such [autopoietic] systems is that their interaction yields systems with the same kind of organization, hence they are \ldblquote self-making\rdblquote (ibid.). The cyber-society that we supposedly are creating right now would be such an autopoietic system.\par Leary argues that feedback (i.e., self-reference) in cybernetic organization leads to \ldblquote fractal forms.\rdblquote What is a fractal form? The term \ldblquote fractal\rdblquote (coined by chaos mathematician Benoit Mandelbrot) is used to describe \ldblquote a shape whose details resemble the whole thing. A mountain range is a kind of fractal, since if you look at an outcropping of rock on a mountain, it looks like a small mountain itself, and if you lean closer to the rock outcropping, you find bumps on the boulders which themselves look like mountains, and so on\rdblquote (Rucker 1992: 45). Fractal forms can be described with the help of circular equations. These equations are called circular equations because after you get an answer, you plug it back into the original equation again and again, countless times (cf. Rushkoff 1995: 22). This image of the fractal - similar components repeated at each level of scale - gives us a better picture of what Leary means. Leary imagines the interpersonal organization of communicating individuals in an information society (a society which is based on unlimited information exchange) as a huge fractal: \ldblquote I, as a person, am similar to you. Yet the juxtaposition of us and millions of others in a fractally organized system results in the apparent complexity of the system as a whole\rdblquote (DD 33). The mind of a single person is seen by Leary as interacting fractal subsystems. \ldblquote As inside, so outside,\rdblquote Leary says, reminding us of medieval mystics who expressed their insights into the real nature of the world in the sentence \ldblquote As above, so below\rdblquote (DD 36). Leary holds that we are all made up of many \ldblquote selves\rdblquote and that circuitous routes of communication exist between these selves. He refers to computer pioneer Marvin Minsky who argues that the mind is made up of independent interacting pieces of soft machinery (cf. DD 32). Leary concludes that the principles of organization that apply to the interpersonal organization of communicating individuals in an information society also apply to the intrapersonal organization of selves in a functioning individual. \par As far as the fractal nature of the world is concerned, Leary argues that the ingestion of LSD would enable us to directly experience this fractal nature: \ldblquote The interconnectedness of the world as it appears to humans in certain mystical and pharmacological states comes from a direct appreciation of its fractal nature. It\rquote s particularly amusing that nearly every LSD user who is shown visual representations of moving fractals exclaims over his or her astonished recognition: \lquote\i That\rquote s \i0 what I see\rquote\rdblquote (DD 33).\par After this short excursion into the world of fractals, let us return to the concept of self-organization. Leary\rquote s cyber-society is a self-organizing system. In order to understand the concept of self-organization, we have to understand how order can arise from chaos (disorder). Leary\rquote s answer to the question of how order can arise from disorder is crucial for the understanding of his concept of the cyber-society. \par How can order arise from chaos? To answer this question Leary refers to a theory by Russian-born chemist and physicist Ilya Prigogine. The theory is called \ldblquote theory of dissipative structures.\rdblquote This theory is the first, and perhaps most influential, detailed description of self-organizing systems (cf. Capra 1997: 88). During the 60s Prigogine developed a new nonlinear thermodynamics to describe the self-organization phenomena in open systems far from equilibrium. While studying the processes of heat convection, Prigogine discovered that there are phenomena which cannot be described with the laws of classical thermodynamics. According to the second law of thermodynamics, there is a trend in physical phenomena from order to disorder. Any isolated, or \ldblquote closed,\rdblquote physical system will proceed spontaneously in the direction of ever-increasing disorder. The phenomena that Prigogine discovered, however, showed that in an open system far from equilibrium coherence and order can arise from thermal chaos. Unlike closed systems, which settle into a state of thermal equilibrium, open systems maintain themselves far from equilibrium in a quasi-steady state characterized by continual flow and change (cf. Capra 1997: 88f.).\par Leary describes Prigogine\rquote s theory of \ldblquote dissipative structures\rdblquote as follows:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 In 1977, Ilya Prigogine won the Nobel Prize for his work on the thermodynamics of nonequilibrium systems, \ldblquote dissipative\rdblquote structures arising out of nonlinear processes. Classical thermodynamics maintained that random (autonomous) local processes such as molecular motion always tend toward a maximum of entropy (disorder). Prigogine showed that in spatially confined neighbourhoods, orderly physical assemblages can spontaneously arise. Individual occurrences that engender these spontaneous coherences are called \ldblquote free agents\rdblquote (DD 52). \par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 As far as the \ldblquote free agents\rdblquote are concerned, Prigogine provides Leary with an explanation that helps Leary to show that in the cyber-society the individuals that make up this society are free to choose whatever they want to do (freedom of the will) and still their interactions produce ordered structures:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 Prigogine\rquote s explanation of the phenomenon of convection are considered heretical by traditional science. For instance, we know that hot air rises, but there\rquote s no reason why it should; molecules are simply more energetic and faster moving than their cooler cohorts. Prigogine asserts that the coherent emergent behavior of masses of hot air is intelligent and volitional. Hot air rises because it \i wants to.\i0 [...] \par Although the motion of a single molecule might appear \ldblquote selfish,\rdblquote aimless with respect to the global organization of its environment, the local interactions of many such individuals produce macrosopic order, in certain circumstances (DD 53).\par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Another interesting thing about self-organizing chaotic systems like the ones described by Prigogine is that they are systems that are governed by orderly rules, yet their behavior is unpredictable because of their complexity. Leary explains: \ldblquote [C]hanges in the initial state of a complex system, \i however small\i0 , lead to arbitrarily large changes after time elapses. Because the initial state is neither precisely measurable nor precisely reproducible, the system is not predictable\rdblquote (DD 54). In Chaos theory this is known as the \ldblquote butterfly effect\rdblquote because of the assertion that a butterfly stirring the air in Beijing can cause a storm in New York next month (cf. Capra 1997: 134). \par According to Leary, more and more people are discovering that change and disequilibrium are the driving forces of the universe and that stability (the static, predictable Newtonian universe) is an illusion (cf. DD 54). More and more people would accept the fact that we live in an unpredictable, chaotic world which cannot be controlled. This change in consciousness would make people realize that static hierarchical dogmatic social structures are outdated and, consequently, lead to change in society. \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 4.3. The observer-created universe\par \pard\b0\i0\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033 In this chapter I am going to show that the epistemology of Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory is constructivist. Like the constructivists, Leary argues that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote (what we accept as reality) is a construction of our minds. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary presents an interesting argument from the field of quantum physics to back this idea \endash Werner Heisenberg\rquote s \ldblquote uncertainty principle.\rdblquote In this chapter I want to discuss this argument and explain Leary\rquote s concept of \ldblquote formatting the brain,\rdblquote which corresponds to the concept of imprinting Leary used in the 70s to show how we can create our own realities. Before I discuss Leary\rquote s interpretation of Heisenberg\rquote s uncertainty principle I will shortly explain what constructivism is. \par Constructivists argue that we do not see the world as \i it\i0 is, we see it as \i we \i0 are. They see the human mind as \ldblquote creator, imposing its categories on what it encounters\rdblquote (Spivey 1997: 2). This means what we accept as objective reality is actually a construction of our minds. Although constructivism was not identifiable as a theoretical orientation until the 1920s or 1930s, constructivist positions have been postulated through the years from classical times (e.g., the scepticist Epimenides from Crete) to the Enlightenment (e.g., philosopher Immanuel Kant) to our modern age (e.g., psychologist Jean Piaget). Kant, for example, argued that humans cannot directly experience external reality because they cannot escape the \ldblquote categories\rdblquote and \ldblquote forms of perception\rdblquote (time, space) through which they perceive the world. Ergo, the \ldblquote Ding an sich\rdblquote (objective reality) remains an enigma (cf. ibid. 6). Constructivists argue that humans impose order on their sensory experience of the outside world, rather than discern it, and that they create knowledge, rather than discover it. As Nancy Neslon Spivey put it in \i The Constructivist Metaphor\i0 : \ldblquote Constructivists view people as constructive agents and view the phenomenon of interest (meaning and knowledge) as built instead of passively \lquote received\rquote by people whose \i ways \i0 of knowing, seeing, understanding, and valuing influence what is known, seen, understood, and valued\rdblquote (Spivey 1997: 3). The \ldblquote radical constructivist\rdblquote Ernst von Glasersfeld, for example, maintains that knowledge is \ldblquote exclusively an order and organization of a world constituted by our experience\rdblquote (Watzlawick 1984: 24) and is not a reflection of an objective ontological reality. This means that the models of reality we create can help us to organize our experiential world, but they cannot help us to discover an objective reality. \par Like the constructivists, Leary argues that objectivity is an illusion. According to Leary, Werner Heisenberg\rquote s \ldblquote uncertainty principle,\rdblquote a percept of quantum physics, is a scientific proof for the fact that knowledge can never be objective, that is, cleansed of all subjective distortion (cf. FB 378). Leary argues that Heisenberg\rquote s uncertainty principle, which states that a subatomic particle\rquote s position and momentum cannot both be accurately known, has serious implications for philosophy and science, as well as for our everyday lives (cf. ibid.). In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary explains: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 Werner Heisenberg\rquote s principle states that there is a limit to objective determinacy. If everyone has a singular viewpoint, constantly changing, then everyone creates his or her own version of reality. This gives the responsibility for reality construction not to a bad-natured biblical God or to an impersonal, mechanical process of entropic devolution, or to an omniscient Marxist state, but to individual brains. Subjective determinacy [...]. Our brains create our own spiritual worlds, as they say along the Ganges (CC 5f.). \par \fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj Furthermore, Leary explains that Heisenberg\rquote s uncertainty principle \ldblquote suggests that our observations fabricate the subject matter, i.e. realities. We can only know what our sense-organs, our measuring instruments and our paradigms or maps describe\rdblquote (Info 2). According to Leary, the \ldblquote Quantum universe\rdblquote that Heisenberg and the other quantum physicists define is an observer-created universe. It is a universe that changes when the viewpoint of the observer changes. \par In order to be able to understand Leary\rquote s argument we have to have some background knowledge about quantum physics and we have to know the crucial difference between classical (Newtonian-Cartesian) physics and quantum physics. Since Heisenberg\rquote s uncertainty principle is often used by various cyber-philosophers as an argument to challenge scientific authority (cf. Dery 1996: 63) I want to explain it here in a detailed way.\par Classical physics suggests that atoms are hard, solid particles that exist independent of an observer (cf. Capra 1982: 78). The quantum physicists, however, discovered that atoms and subatomic particles are far from being hard, solid objects. The quantum theory of Albert Einstein, Werner Heisenberg, Max Planck, et al. suggests that subatomic particles are very abstract entities that have a dual nature. Depending on how we look at them, they appear sometimes as particles, sometimes as waves. But how can something be, at the same time, a particle, an entity confined to a very small space, and a wave which is spread out over a large region of space? Fritjof Capra explains: \par \par \pard\li705\qj\fs20 The situation seemed hopelessly paradoxical until it was realized that the terms \ldblquote particle\rdblquote and \ldblquote wave\rdblquote refer to classical concepts which are not fully adequate to describe atomic phenomena. An electron is neither a particle nor a wave, but it may show particle-like aspects in some situations and wave-like in others. While it acts like a particle, it is capable of developing its wave nature at the expense of its particle nature, and vice versa, thus undergoing continual transformations from particle to wave and wave to particle. \i This means that neither electron nor any other atomic \ldblquote object\rdblquote has any intrinsic properties independent\fs24 \fs20 of its environment. The properties it shows \endash particle-like or wave- like \endash will depend on the experimental situation, that is, on the apparatus it is forced to interact with\i0 [italics mine] (ibid. 79).\par \par \pard\qj\i \i0\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj According to quantum physics, no atomic \ldblquote object\rdblquote has any intrinsic properties independent of an observer (i.e., the measuring instruments and the concepts an observer uses to describe atomic objects). In other words, scientists create models of reality, using concepts which are constructions of their minds, and they create knowledge rather than discover it. \par The quantum physicists had to realize that the classical concepts they used could not provide a complete description of reality. Heisenberg managed to express the limitations of classical concepts in a precise mathematical form, which is known as the uncertainty principle. Capra describes the uncertainty principle as follows: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 The uncertainty principle [...] consists of a set of mathematical relations that determine the extent to which classical concepts can be applied to atomic phenomena; these relations stake out the limits of human imagination in the atomic world. Whenever we use classical terms \endash particle, wave, position, velocity \endash to describe atomic phenomena, we find that there are pairs of concepts, or aspects, which are interrelated and cannot be defined simultaneously in a precise way. The more we emphasize one aspect in our description the more the other aspect becomes uncertain, and the precise relation between the two is given by the uncertainty principle (ibid.).\par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj By showing that all the concepts scientists use to describe atomic phenomena are limited, Heisenberg made it clear that scientists do not deal with objective truth but with limited and approximate subjective descriptions (models) of reality. \par For Leary, this means that anybody who claims that his/her model of reality is the absolute truth is simply wrong. Since we cannot say anything definite about objective reality there is simply no way to justify the claim that a model of reality is true or false. Leary suggests that we should learn to think of models not as \ldblquote false\rdblquote or \ldblquote true\rdblquote in some abstract and absolute sense, but as the products of humans in concrete situations, all possessing some kind of relative truth, and none of them big enough and inclusive enough to contain all the truth. We filter reality. We only perceive what confirms our model of the world (cf. CC 39f.)\par Leary argues that out of the million signals received from the outside world per second, the human brain ignores most and organizes the rest in conformity with whatever model, or belief system, it currently holds. According to Leary, our usual habit of screening out all signals not compatible with our own favorite reality-map is the mechanism which keeps us all far stupider than we should. If we want to become more intelligent we have to be able to change the models of reality imprinted in our brains and learn to see the world through different models simultaneously. According to Leary, intelligence means awareness of detail. The more signals you receive/process per second the more intelligent you are (cf. CC 35ff.).\par Like many constructivists, cognitive psychologists, and cyberneticists, Leary sees the brain as an information processing system (computer). Our minds, according to this metaphor, serve as the software that programs the neural hardware (cf. CC 39). According to Leary, most of the classic psychological terms can now be redefined in terms of computer concepts. The psychological process of imprinting, for example, could now be called \ldblquote formatting the brain.\rdblquote Imprinting means sudden programming of the brain. Leary explains: \ldblquote Imprinting is a multimedia input of data. For a baby, it\rquote s the warmth of the mother, the softness, the sound, the taste of the breast. That\rquote s called booting up or formatting. Now baby\rquote s brain is hooked to Mama and then of course from Mama to Daddy, food, etc., but it \lquote s the Mama file that\rquote s the first imprint\rdblquote (CC 35). (The reader who has read chapter three, where the concept of imprinting as interpreted by Leary is explained, should be able to understand this quotation.) According to Leary, psychedelic drugs enable us to \ldblquote re-formate the brain,\rdblquote that is, to change imprints. This means that if one takes LSD one\rquote s experience of life is reevaluated in a neutral context and put it into a new order (cf. ibid.). This process of \ldblquote re-formatting the brain\rdblquote corresponds to John Lilly\rquote s concept of \ldblquote metaprogramming,\rdblquote which is explained in chapter 3.3., \ldblquote The Neuroelectric-Metaprogramming Circuit.\rdblquote (It should be mentioned here that Leary\rquote s computer-brain model was inspired by John Lilly\rquote s model of the \ldblquote human biocomputer\rdblquote which Lilly developed in the mid 60s. Lilly used this model, which is described in \i Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Biocomputer\i0 , for psychotherapy, meditation, and for his own experiments with LSD.) \par According to Leary, at present the computer-brain-formatting metaphor is the best metaphor for explaining what happens during a psychedelic experience; it is the best metaphor for understanding and operating the mind, the best metaphor for learning how we can consciously create our own realities (cf. CC 39).\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1031\b\i\fs28 4.4. The Sociology of LSD\par \pard\b0\i0\fs20\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\fs24 In Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology psychedelic drugs do not play a central role. In various interviews Leary proclaimed that the personal computer is the LSD of the 1990s. However, psychedelics - LSD, psilocybin, and MDMA (Ecstasy) \endash seem to be making a big comeback in the 90s. That is why I want to discuss two interesting essays by Leary which explain why psychedelic drugs are in vogue again. \par Are psychedelics really making a comeback in the 90s? Yes, they do. In an essay by Dan Joy called \ldblquote Psychedelic Renaissance\rdblquote (this essay serves as introduction to the 1992 edition of \i Psychedelics Encyclopedia) \i0 we can find quotations from newspaper/magazine articles from all over the world that indicate that there is a worldwide resurgence of interest in psychedelic drugs - especially LSD. \i Newsweek \i0 magazine, for example, reported in its February 3, 1992 issue that \ldblquote acid is staging a serious comeback in the 90s, especially among affluent suburban teenagers.\rdblquote According to this report, the rise in popularity is partially attributed to weaker doses, which result in fewer \ldblquote bad trips\rdblquote and are more likely to be taken at parties. Surveys conducted by the National Institute on Drug Abuse and the University of Michigan has shown that in 1991 LSD had overtaken cocaine in popularity among high school seniors for the first time since 1976 (cf. Stafford 1992: III-23).\par In his essays \ldblquote The Sociology of LSD\rdblquote and \ldblquote Just Say Know: The Eternal Antidote to Fascism,\rdblquote Leary gives a sociological explanation for this phenomenon. He explains why the first LSD boom declined and why more LSD is being used today (so he claims) than in the 60s. \par According to Leary, LSD \endash like the computer, the railroad, or the automobile \endash is a technology (a tool which is the result of scientific knowledge being used for practical purposes) that introduced profound changes in society. However, \ldblquote change causes fear,\rdblquote Leary says. Whenever a human being is confronted with something new, he/she would automatically react with fear. Leary explains: \ldblquote [T]here are powerful genetic mechanisms, reinforced by society, geared to react with fear at the approach of the new. This neophobia obviously has a survival value. At each stage of evolution each gene pool has been protected by those with the nervous system wired to cry \i Danger\i0 ! \i Caution\rdblquote\i0 (CC 101)! According to Leary, fear is the \ldblquote glue\rdblquote that holds \ldblquote human hives\rdblquote together. Fear guards continuity. \par However, whenever cultures reach states of national security, economic prosperity, and imperial confidence people start to reflect about their fears. A counterculture emerges and encourage novel art forms and lifestyles. Philosophers, scientists and artists reject the old values and search for new meaning. \par Exactly at these times, when philosophy, science, and religion \ldblquote vibrate with transcendent energies\rdblquote two things happen: external exploration into undiscovered geographical realms, and inner exploration using brain-change drugs (cf. CC 97). Of course, Leary is thinking about the 60s here. However, this cultural phenomenon could also be found in ancient India (the time of the Aryan conquest), ancient Greece, or in Europe in the 16\super th\nosupersub century (the Enlightenment). Let us, for example, look at the situation in ancient Greece: Leary explains that the Athenians were self-reliant pioneer navigators that discovered new territories (external exploration), that the Greek philosophers developed new philosophic models that help us to understand how our brain works, and that the Greek mystery cult of Eleusis used an LSD-type substance in its annual rebirth ceremonies (inner exploration).\par At such times in the emergence of a civilization, optimistic change-agents would manage to push our species into new adventures and introduce new technologies in society. However, the history of science has shown that every new technology that compels change in lifestyle or in understanding of the human nature has always taken one or two generations to be socialized and domesticated (cf. CC 102). Right after their discovery the newly discovered technologies are considered to be dangerous, heretical, and morally wrong by the government. Leary reminds us that Vatican astronomers in the 16\super th\nosupersub century, for example, consistently refused to look through Galileo Galilee\rquote s telescopes and tried to force Galileo to give up the heliocentric worldview. \par Leary concludes that, given these facts, it is not surprising that LSD was considered to be dangerous and morally wrong when it first appeared in the 60s. According to Leary, the LSD-hysteria is over now because psychedelic drug usage is no longer a trendy topic for the media and politicians; we have new problems (oil, \ldblquote crack\rdblquote , the New Cold War, etc). Now that the LSD-hysteria has died down, more and more smart young people are learning how to intelligently use brain-change drugs like LSD for recreational purposes and to reach enlightenment. More and more people realize that the ultimate (and only) pleasure organ is the brain, \ldblquote an enormous hundred-billion-cell hedonic system waiting to be activated\rdblquote (CC 100). There are almost no bad trips being reported, because \ldblquote the acid is clean and the users are sophisticated\rdblquote (ibid.). According to Leary, the average suburban teenager today knows more about the varied effects of brain-change drugs than the most learned researcher twenty years ago\rdblquote (ibid.). \par Leary points out that, in addition to the pure LSD that is now available, new brain change drugs (\ldblquote designer drugs\rdblquote ) are now appearing in plentiful quantities. In comparison to the \ldblquote crude\rdblquote psychedelics of long duration and unpredictable effect that were used in the 60s (e.g., STP), the new shortacting drugs (e.g., MDMA, the favorite drug of people in the techno-rave scene) would be safer and easier to handle. As Leary puts it: \ldblquote Just as computers today are more efficient, cheaper, and more reliable than those thirty years ago, so are the drugs\rdblquote (ibid.). Leary predicts that the next decade will see the emergence of dozens of new, improved, stronger, safer, psychoactive drugs \endash and people would be ready for these new drugs: \par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 There is an enormous market of some fifty million Americans today who would joyfully purchase a safe euphoriant, a precise psychedelic of short duration and predictable effect, an effective intelligence increaser, a harmless energizer, a secure sensual enhancer. An aphrodisiac! [...]\par \pard\li705\qj The last two decades have just whetted humanity\rquote s eternal appetite for technologies to activate and direct one\rquote s own brain function. \i The drug movement has just begun\i0 [my italics] (CC 100). \par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 According to Leary, this increase in popularity of psychedelic drugs, especially LSD, is closely linked to the fact that we are living in a world where everything is changing faster and faster. There would be an enormous acceleration of knowledge we have to keep up with in order to survive in the new information society. Psychedelics, especially LSD, would help us to cope with this acceleration by accelerating our brain functions. In his earlier theories, in the 60s and 70s, Leary suggests that LSD allows us to temporarily suspend our imprints (which means that we leave our rigid reality tunnels and enter a multi-choice reality-labyrinth) and re-imprint new, more complex, funnier realities. In terms of Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology, this means that under the influence of the drug there is a dramatic increase in the amount of information processed per second. The more new circuits are opened in the brain (the \ldblquote ROM brain-circuits\rdblquote ), the more new information we notice in the objects we perceive. Leary argues that those people who like LSD will always be able to deal with what is to come because they know how to \ldblquote surf the waves of chaotic change\rdblquote planfully. \ldblquote\i The future is going to spin faster and wilder, of that we can be sure\i0\rdblquote Leary predicts. \ldblquote\i If you don\rquote t like acid, rest assured you\rquote re not going to like the future. Now, more than ever before, we need to gear our brains to multiplicity, complexity, relativity, change. Those who can handle acid will be able to deal more comfortably with what is to come\i0 [my italics]\rdblquote (CC 103).\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\fs28 4.5. Designer Dying/The postbiological options of the Information Species\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par Leary was definitely right when he said that \ldblquote the future is going to spin faster and wilder\rdblquote - no matter if we took LSD or not. In the last couple of decades there has been an enormous acceleration of technological development so that today we are literally not able to predict which new, groundbreaking technologies will be discovered tomorrow. Technology is changing faster and faster. What was still considered to be science fiction yesterday is reality today (Internet, virtual reality, cloning, etc). In Leary\rquote s opinion this accelerating change rate is a sign that things are getting better. As far as changes that new technologies introduce into society are concerned, Leary has always been an optimist: He thought that computers, the Internet, and other interactive media would help us to dissolve hierarchical social structures, create the realities of our dreams, make the world a better place to live in. More than that, decentralization of power and the emergence of a self-organizing cyber society would actually be the inevitable consequences of these new technologies. Computers, as well as psychedelic drugs, would enable us to break out of practically all (social, political and personality-brain) structures that limit our thinking and perception and force us to behave in a certain way. This means we (theoretically) have total control over the courses of our lives. \par However, there seems to be one last limit: death. Is there a way to escape death? How can we solve this last problem? Can technology help us to become immortal? What does Leary say about the problem of death? I am including this chapter about death in my paper because the solutions that Leary suggests to overcome this last problem seem to be a logical consequence of his cyberpunk attitude, his utopian faith in technology, and his eternal optimism. Leary\rquote s last book, \i Design for Dying \i0 (co-authored with R. U. Sirius)\i ,\i0 makes his Quantum psychology theory complete. In this book he suggests different techniques that allow us to transcend the last limit, which is imposed on us by mortality.\par In his essay \ldblquote Common-Sense Alternatives to Involuntary Death\rdblquote (CC 187-202), co-written with Eric Gullichsen, Leary predicted that the cybernetic age we are entering would be an age of freedom and enlightenment:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 The exploding technology of light-speed and multimedia communication lays a delicious feast of knowledge and personal choice within our easy grasp. Under such conditions, the operating wisdom and control naturally passes from aeons-old power of gene pools, and locates in the rapidly self-modifying brains of individuals capable of dealing with an ever-accelerating rate of change.\par Aided by customized, personally programmed, quantum-linguistic appliances, individuals can choose their own social and genetic future, and perhaps choose not to \lquote die\rquote \rdblquote (CC 190). \par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Leary writes that first step towards solving the problem of death is to deprogram the \ldblquote dying reflexes\rdblquote imprinted in our brains by our culture and start thinking scientifically about alternatives to \ldblquote going quietly and passively into the dark night or the neon-lit, Muzak-enhanced Disney-heaven of the Jesus Gang.\rdblquote Leary points out that in pre-cybernetic cultures \ldblquote the reflexive genetic duty of the top management (those in social control of the various gene pools) was to make humans feel weak, helpless, and dependent in the face of death. The good of the race or nation was ensured at the cost of the sacrifice of the individual\rdblquote (CC 188). By controlling the \ldblquote dying reflexes\rdblquote and orchestrating the trigger stimuli that activate the \ldblquote death circuits\rdblquote (accomplished through rituals that imprint dependence and docility when the \ldblquote dying alarm bells go off\rdblquote in the brain) the gene-pool managers have maintained the attitude of dedication, obedience, and submission. For millennia the fear of death has depreciated individual confidence and increased dependence on authority. However, now that the individual is empowered by computers and other technologies, he/she would start thinking for him-/herself and question authority. People would learn to deprogram the \ldblquote dying reflexes\rdblquote and take personal responsibility for their dying process. \par According to Leary, death is only a problem of knowledge, that is, information processing. \ldblquote Once we comprehend that death is a problem of knowledge - information processing - solutions can emerge,\rdblquote writes Leary\i \i0 (DD 143). Leary has always been very optimistic that scientists will soon develop technologies that make us immortal. In \i Design for Dying\i0 , he predicts that \ldblquote the concept of involuntary, irreversible metabolic coma known as \lquote death\rquote is about to become an outmoded, antiquated superstition\rdblquote (ibid.). He suggests that it would be a wise decision to preserve one\rquote s body (freeze the body, or store the information about the physical structure of the body digitally) and store one\rquote s believe systems digitally, because it will only be a matter of five or ten years until the problem of biological death will be solved and we will also be able to exist as electronic life-forms on computer networks (cf. DD 149). \ldblquote\i To immortalize: digitize!\i0\rdblquote is one of Leary\rquote s slogans. \par In \i Design for Dying\i0 ,\i \i0 Leary discusses about thirty different techniques/technologies for extending our life spans and achieving immortality. Leary admits that these techniques do not give us a 100% insurance that we will become immortal. However, it is always better to be optimistic and think creatively about new possibilities than to be pessimistic and accept the bleak visions of the future imposed on us by authorities. I just want to mention three of the most spectacular techniques/technologies that Leary discusses, so the reader knows what Leary is talking about: \par \pard{\pntext\f0 1.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart1\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 Cryonics: The body, or only the brain is frozen, preserved until a time of more advanced medical knowledge (cf. DD 153-61). \par \pard{\pntext\f0 2.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart2\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 Nanotechnology: A nanometer is a millionth of a millimeter. Some scientists predict that we will soon be able to construct mechanical devices of this scale. Molecular robots could remove diseased DNA segments from the cells of AIDS patients, or repair cells in the body and keep the body from aging. A cryonically preserved brain that is damaged from freezing could be repaired. Machines that pick up single atoms and put them together to form molecules already exist (for more info see Scientific American homepage: \cf1\lang1031\ul http://www.sciam.com/exhibit/040000trends.html\cf0\lang1033\ulnone ). Nano-machines could produce any desired article (rocket ships, sweets, a body organ, etc) from dirt and sunlight. This would mean we have total control over the material world. (cf. DD 161-67).\par \pard{\pntext\f0 3.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart3\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 The \ldblquote microtome procedure\rdblquote or \ldblquote downloading:\rdblquote This method is suggested by Carnegie-Mellon robotics scientist and artificial intelligence theorist Hans Moravec. It generally involves a cryonically preserved brain. The brain is sliced thin. Each slice is scanned into a computer using an electron microscope. The computer reconstructs\i \i0 the brain\rquote s circuitry onto some form of hardware. Moravec\rquote s notion of \ldblquote downloading\rdblquote offers a theoretical but highly exhaustively worked out solution to the problem of how mind can be extracted from body (cf. Dery 1996: 299f.). The information about the brain structure could be used to build a new brain with the help of nanotechnology or we could exist as electronic life form in computer networks (cf. DD 172). In addition to Moravec\rquote s way of \ldblquote downloading,\rdblquote Leary offers another: \ldblquote Through storage of one\rquote s belief systems as online data structures, driven by selected control structures (the electronic analogue to will?), one\rquote s neuronal apparatus will operate in silicon as it did on the wetware of the brain, although faster, more accurately, more self-mutably, and \endash if desired \endash forever\rdblquote (DD 149).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par Leary does not only predict that we will soon be immortal. He also predicts that, \ldblquote In the near future, what is now taken for granted as the perishable human creature will be a mere historical curiosity, one point amidst unimaginable, multidimensional diversity of form. Individuals [...] will be free to choose to reassume flesh-and-blood form, constructed for the occasion by the appropriate science\rdblquote (CC 202). According to Leary, all the new technologies that have been developed in the last couple of decades (especially computer-information technology) indicate that natural evolution of the human species is near completion. Leary points out that some people (especially computer scientists) are no longer interested in merely procreating, they are designing their successors. He quotes Hans Moravec who writes, \ldblquote We owe our existence to organic evolution. But we owe it little loyalty. We are on the threshold of change in the universe comparable to the transition from nonlife to life\rdblquote (CC 199). What Moravec and Leary mean is that humanity has now reached a turning point in the operation of the process of evolution. We are entering the \ldblquote posthuman\rdblquote age. Leary explains:\par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 [It is] a point at which the next evolutionary step of the species will be under our control. Or more correctly, the next steps, which will occur in parallel, will result in an explosion of diversity of the human species. We shall no longer be dependent on fitness in any physical sense for survival. In the near future, computer and biological technologies [nanotechnology, genetic engineering] will make the human form a matter totally determined by individual choice. [...]\par Humans already come in some variety of races and sizes. In comparison to what \ldblquote human\rdblquote will mean within the next century, we humans are at present as indistinguishable from another as are hydrogen molecules. As we become conscious of this, our anthropocentrism will decrease (DD 148). \par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\par \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24 Reading Leary\rquote s predictions about future technologies that enable us to become immortal and make the human form \ldblquote a matter totally determined by individual choice,\rdblquote we get the impression that Leary\rquote s aim, in \i Design for Dying\i0 , is to persuade people to place their faith in an end-of-the-century deus ex machina, a machine god that would free all of us from limitations of any sort, making us godlike beings \endash technology as the Savior of humanity. It cannot be denied that \i Design for Dying\i0 is a hymn to technological progress; however, this is not the main message that Leary tries to communicate in this book. Leary does not want people to blindly believe in his techno-eschatology. He does not want to persuade people to choose the cryonics option or to \ldblquote download\rdblquote their brains/minds into a computer just because \i he\i0 said that this would be the best thing to do. The aim of \i Design for Dying\i0 is to make people aware that they have choices, choices regarding how to die and, someday soon, they may have choices about whether to die. Leary tells us that we should not blindly accept the \ldblquote dogmas of monotheistic-totalitarian religions\rdblquote that have \ldblquote cleverly monopolized the rituals of dying to increase control over the superstitious\rdblquote (CC 189). The main message that Leary is trying to communicate in \i Design for Dying\i0 is \ldblquote Think for yourself and question authority\rdblquote (DD 2). (We will see that these are the basic guiding principles that guided Leary\rquote s whole life and work.) In \ldblquote Common-sense Alternatives to Involuntary Death,\rdblquote Leary writes: \ldblquote We do not endorse any particular technique of achieving immortality. \i Our aim is to review all options and encourage creative thinking about new possibilities\i0 [my italics]\rdblquote (CC 195). \par It should also be mentioned here that Leary was very well aware that technology is not intrinsically liberating and that his visions of a technotopia only show \ldblquote one side of the coin.\rdblquote At a talk in San Francisco in 1992, for example, Leary pointed out that the computer (which, here, stands for technology in general) can be an engine of liberation \i as well as\i0 a tool of social control. Making us aware that most funding for computer and virtual-reality research and development can be traced to the military, Leary argued that the goal of technological endeavor sponsored by governments and large corporations usually is to create rigidly controllable and predictable systems by \ldblquote taking the human being out of the loop\rdblquote (cf. Stafford 1992: III-48f.). In the light of this viewpoint, according to Leary, the project of developing \ldblquote artificial intelligence\rdblquote becomes one of duplicating or exceeding certain human capacities with machines, while eliminating the unpredictability of human intuition, creativity, free will, and whim \endash factors that have been responsible for many of the truly revolutionary advances in science and technology. Leary pointed out that artificial intelligence endeavors have utterly failed to approximate the responsiveness, sensitivity, subtlety, and complexity of the human brain. He summed up this perspective by referring to the phrase \ldblquote artificial intelligence\rdblquote as \ldblquote an oxymoron\rdblquote (cf. ibid.).\par Given these facts, it is not surprising that Leary himself did not decide to \ldblquote download\rdblquote his own brain into a computer in order to escape death and continue to exist as electronic life-form (i.e., artificial intelligence). Nor did he choose the cryonics option or \ldblquote die live on the Internet,\rdblquote as he had announced soon before he died. He decided to be cremated. His ashes were placed aboard a rocket ship and sent to outer space, where they now orbit the earth. Why did he not choose the cryonics option? \ldblquote I have always considered myself an astronaut, and in death this will become a reality,\rdblquote was Leary\rquote s answer to this question (DD 5). His plans for cryonic preservation were only intended as a symbolic gesture, encouraging people to investigate alternatives to \ldblquote involuntary dying.\rdblquote \par Leary has always been of the opinion that it is not important what you do, as long as you are \ldblquote doing your own thing\rdblquote - which means that you keep thinking for yourself and questioning authority - and \ldblquote do not lay your trip on others.\rdblquote (Remember the two commandments that Leary suggested in \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 .) In \i Design for Dying\i0 , R. U. Sirius explains that Leary did not see himself as a messenger for the cryonics movement or any other movement because he had never liked to be part of somebody else\rquote s \ldblquote game.\rdblquote As Sirius put it, \par \fs20\par \pard\li708\qj [W]hether it was Harvard, the peace movement, Eldridge Cleaver, the Californian penal system, or the Extropian movement (advocates of cryonics and nanotechnology), Tim Leary didn\rquote t like to be a captive pawn in anybody else\rquote s game. And so he escaped. Once again.\par \pard\fi708\qj\i What is the way of the Tao? Move on.\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\i0 Lao-Tzu (DD 192). \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\b\i\f1\fs28\par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\f0 4.6. A comparison/summary of Leary\rquote s theories\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par So far, I have presented only Leary\rquote s view of the emergence of a new global counterculture which Leary calls the cyberpunks, or New Breed. Now the question arises: Is this countercultural movement Leary is talking about really going to change the world? Is this new counterculture really going to create a post-political society based on individual freedom? Will the techno-utopia that Leary\rquote s cyberpunks believe in finally become reality? Or is the techno-eschatology that Leary\rquote s cyberpunks put their faith in nothing more than a naive escapist fantasy that blinds us to the real (social, political, economic, and ecological) problems all around us? \par Before I will try to answer these questions in a critical analysis of the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s, I want to shortly compare the three most important theories that Leary has produced in the course of his career as counterculture spokesman. There are two reasons why I think that is useful to make this comparison (which can also be read as a summary) before discussing the cybernetic counterculture of the 90s: \par First of all, if we really want to understand the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s we first have to go back to the 60s, because the cyberpunks and \ldblquote cyber-hippies\rdblquote of the 90s have adopted many ideas and beliefs from the hippies of the 60s. One way to find out what the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s and the psychedelic counterculture of the 60s have in common is to study Leary\rquote s theories. The comparison I am going to make will help me to show that the difference between these two countercultures is not as big as one might think. According to Leary, the 90s counterculture is actually a continuation of the 60s counterculture. As Leary might put it: The goal has remained the same, only the methods/technologies have changed. \par Second, this comparison will help me to show that the hippies were not nearly as rural and anti-technology as some cultural critics argue. Leary, the controversial Harvard psychologist, was very well aware that he was \ldblquote turning on the world\rdblquote with a high-tech product (LSD) and that a large part of the hippies did not on principle reject technology. According to Leary, all the hippies wanted was to experience ecstasy and freedom - freedom from self-imposed limitations as well as limitations imposed on them by society - and, for them, the high-tech product LSD was acceptable because it helped them to reach their goal. \par \par If we compare Leary\rquote s Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness (\i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 ) to his Exo-Psychology theory (\i Exo-Psychology\i0 , \i Neuropolitics\i0 ) and his Quantum Psychology theory (\i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , \i Design for Dying\i0 ) we find that there are at least three things that these three theories have in common:\par \pard{\pntext\f0 1.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart1\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 They are all based on the idea that we can create our own realities, that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of our minds (i.e., our nervous systems).\par \pard{\pntext\f0 2.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart2\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 They are all concerned with how we can attain freedom, how we can break free from all limits \endash selfimposed as well as external, metaphysical as well as physical. All the countercultures that Leary describes in his different theories have the same aim: Individual freedom, Ecstasy (i.e., \ldblquote the experience of attaining freedom from limitations, either self-imposed or external\rdblquote ).\par \pard{\pntext\f0 3.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart3\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 They are all based on the belief that science and technology can help us to attain freedom, enlightenment, and immortality. \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par Ad 1.) All of Leary\rquote s theories are based on the belief that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of our minds/nervous systems. In other words, the observer (i.e., the observer\rquote s nervous system) creates the universe, or \ldblquote reality tunnel,\rdblquote he/she lives in. It could be said that Leary\rquote s major thesis, in all of his theories, is that in this century the human nervous system has discovered its own creativity and its own limitations. We have discovered that the realities our parents, governmental institutions, priests, and scientists are trying to impose on us are arbitrary constructions and that the only way to escape these \ldblquote reality tunnels\rdblquote imposed on us is to learn to understand how our brains operate and use this knowledge to create our own realities. All of Leary\rquote s theories describe models that explain how the human brain works, and suggest different methods which, according to Leary, can help us to escape the \ldblquote authorized realities\rdblquote that are \ldblquote jealously guarded by the ones in power.\rdblquote \par In the 60s and 70s, Leary used the concept of imprinting to explain how the brain works. According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology theory, there are certain brief \ldblquote critical periods\rdblquote in a human being\rquote s life during which imprints are made. These imprints (fixed neural structures) determine our realities; they determine what we will see and will \ldblquote not see.\rdblquote Imprints are permanent. Only strong bio-chemical shock can suspend an imprint. The method/technology to change imprints that Leary suggests is to take LSD. According to Leary, during a psychedelic drug experience the imprints in a person\rquote s brain are suspended and the person can consciously re-imprint new realities, realities he/she likes better than the old ones.\par In the 80s and 90s, psychedelic drugs played only a secondary role in Leary\rquote s theories. \ldblquote The PC is the LSD of the 90s,\rdblquote Leary proclaimed. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary suggests that the computer is a tool that can help us to create our own realities. How? Leary imagines that the human brain works like a digital computer. In his Quantum-Psychology theory, he explains that the brain converts every sensory stimulation into directories and files of 0/1 signals. The sensory input programs the brain and determines the realities that we inhabit. This means that every \ldblquote reality\rdblquote consists of 0/1 bits of information. According to Leary, this is the reason why for the brain digital (screen-) realities are not less real than the \ldblquote material\rdblquote reality and why the computer can help us to create our own (digital) realities.\par Another argument that Leary uses to back his idea that reality can be consciously designed is a daring interpretation of chaos theory. In \i Design for Dying\i0 , Leary describes the world as a self-organizing chaotic system, as one big fractal. What goes on inside any one person\rquote s head is reflected, in some manner, on every other level of reality. As Leary puts it: \ldblquote As inside, so outside.\rdblquote All of the different levels of reality (nervous system, social system, etc) are logically connected. This means that if we change our perception of the world and our thinking, the world will automatically change as well (because everything is logically connected). So any individual being has the ability to redesign reality at large (cf. DD 32f.). According to Leary, the fractal nature of the universe can be experienced when we take LSD.\par I have just said that drugs only played a secondary role in Leary\rquote s later theories. This is true. However, it should be mentioned here that, in \i Chaos & Cyberculture,\i0 Leary points out that the new \ldblquote designer drugs\rdblquote that are now appearing in \ldblquote plentiful qualities\rdblquote are also helpful tools that enable us to create our own realities (CC 100). According to Leary, the new designer drugs (e.g. Ecstasy) are much more predictable and easier to handle than the \ldblquote crude\rdblquote psychedelics that were used in the 60s. We just have to decide what we would like reality to be like and take the drug that will alter our observations about reality in the way we want it to be altered. In other words, the \ldblquote world\rdblquote will change because it is observed differently.\par According to Leary, the Hippies were the first generation in human history that knew how to create their own realities consciously (with LSD). Equipped with new, refined technologies (computers, designer drugs, etc), the cyberpunks of the late 80s and 90s are already experts in creating \ldblquote designer realities.\rdblquote\par Ad 2.) If we compare Leary\rquote s different theories, in which he captures the most important beliefs and ideas that prevailed in the different countercultures he was part of, we find that the countercultures that Leary describes (the Beats, the Hippies, the cyberpunks) have many things in common. Most important of all, they all have the same aim: Individual freedom. According to Leary, the Beats, the Hippies, and the cyberpunks all belong to one and the same revolutionary movement. In his theories, Leary tries to show that this movement which has its roots in the 50s (the Beats) and 60s (the Hippies) is creating \ldblquote a post-political society that is based on Ecstasy, i.e. the experience of individual freedom\rdblquote (PE 2) Now how does Leary define the terms \ldblquote Ecstasy\rdblquote and \ldblquote individual freedom\rdblquote ? For Leary, freedom means much more than free expression or having the right to vote. It is a state of consciousness in which all limits are transcended \endash Ecstasy. In the essay \ldblquote Politics of Ecstasy: The Youth Revolutions of the 20\super th\nosupersub Century,\rdblquote Leary defines Ecstasy as follows: \ldblquote [Ecstasy is] the experience of attaining freedom from limitations, either self-imposed or external; a state of exalted delight in which normal understanding is felt to be surpassed. From the Greek \lquote ex-stasis.\rquote By definition, ecstasy is an ongoing on/off process. It requires a continual sequence of \lquote dropping out.\rquote On those occasions when many individuals share the ecstatic experience at the same time, they create a brief-lived \lquote counter-culture.\rquote Synonyms [of Ecstasy are]: Euphoria, [...] bliss, nirvana, rapture\rdblquote (PE 1). According to Leary, the \ldblquote psychedelic-cybernetic revolution\rdblquote that started with the Beats in the late 50s in America is a revolution based on ecstatic states of being in which politics (\ldblquote the primitive struggle for power and territory\rdblquote ) and ethical norms are transcended. This movement has been made possible by psychedelic drugs and cybernetic-electronic technology. According to Leary, this individual-freedom movement is new to human history because it is not based on geography, politics, class, or religion. It has to do not with changes in the political structure but with changes in the individual mind. It is a \ldblquote consciousness revolution.\rdblquote\par All of Leary\rquote s theories contain models that explain how human consciousness has changed in the course of evolution. They describe different levels of consciousness which correspond to different stages in human evolution. According to Leary, human evolution is an evolution towards freedom. Psychedelics and computers play an important role in Leary\rquote s vision of humanity\rquote s development towards this state of total freedom. By helping us to understand how our brains work and enabling us to activate the higher levels of consciousness (which have not been accessible to the majority of people in the past) they help to speed up human evolution. As more and more people are discovering how to activate these higher levels of consciousness - which are characterized by freedom from limitations and an endless number of choices that are open to the individual - we are moving closer and closer to the final stage of human evolution which Leary describes as \ldblquote the culmination of the mystical, transcendental, spooky, hallucinatory dreams which we have envisioned in our highest psychedelic (mind-opened) states\rdblquote (PE 2).\par The higher levels of consciousness that Leary describes in his Theory of the Seven Levels of Consciousness and his model of the Eight Circuits of the Brain (which is an extended version of the model with only seven levels) give us an idea how our future is going to look like. When we activate the so called post-terrestrial circuits of the brain (i.e., the higher levels of consciousness) that Leary defines in his Eight Circuit model, we are able to escape from the narrow \ldblquote reality tunnels\rdblquote (struggle for power and territory, etc) imprinted in our brains, which Leary sees as the cause of all suffering. When we activate the Metaprogramming Circuit, we can suspend imprints and re-imprint into our brains any reality we like. When we open the Neurogenetic Circuit, we can even break free from the \ldblquote constraints of the DNA.\rdblquote Finally, when we activate the Neuroatomic Circuit, we reach the highest level of consciousness which goes beyond form, words, and \ldblquote hallucinatory struggles.\rdblquote This means we are also free from the \ldblquote constraints of matter\rdblquote and become immortal. In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary predicts that this final stage of human evolution \ldblquote where the human form is a matter totally determined by individual choice\rdblquote is not so far away. Leary argues that, right now, scientists are developing new technologies (e.g., nanotechnology) that will allow us to \ldblquote manipulate matter as information,\rdblquote which means that, thanks to technology, we will soon be able to assume any form we like. For example, we will be able to \ldblquote download\rdblquote our brains into computers and exist as \lquote immortal\rquote electronic life forms. \par Ad 3.) Leary has never been a technophobe. In fact, he has always believed that science and technology can help us to attain freedom, enlightenment, and immortality. Leary has always been open to new scientific discoveries and has embraced the new technologies as aids to positive social and spiritual transformation. \par In the 60s, Leary preached that LSD could help us to create a new post-political society based on Ecstasy and it would show us the way to enlightenment. Leary was very well aware of the fact the LSD is a high-tech product and he realized that the hippies were not against technology on principle. (I want to remind the reader that LSD originally came from the high-tech laboratories of a pharmaceutical company in Switzerland, the Sandoz company.) LSD was not the only method/technology to expand one\rquote s mind that Leary suggested in the 60s. He also organized high-tech light shows (psychedelic light shows) which were supposed to produce the same effects as a dose of LSD. \par In the 70s, Leary realized that LSD was not the magic cure-all he thought it was. So he started looking for other technologies that might help us to free ourselves from authority and attain freedom, enlightenment and immortality. In \i Neuropolitics\i0 (1977), he suggests that computers could be used to create a \ldblquote global electronic nervous system,\rdblquote an electronic communication network which would weaken the power of politicians and finally lead to the fall of representative government. However, the emergence of globe-linking electronic communication would just be a period of transition that prepares us for the next stage in human evolution which, according to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology , is space migration. In \i Exo-Psychology \i0 (\ldblquote the psychology of post-terrestrial existence\rdblquote ), Leary argues that the purpose of technology is to enable us to leave this primitve planet and migrate to space where we might find our creator - the Higher Intelligence which seeded life on this planet in form of the DNA. According to Leary\rquote s Exo-Psychology, the aim of life is to find this Higher Intelligence and fuse with \ldblquote hir.\rdblquote Technology would help us to reach this aim. \par In the 80s, when computers became accessible to millions of people and the Internet was opened to the public, Leary became an energetic promoter of the Internet and virtual reality. In\i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary describes the computer as magic tool which enables the individual to create his/her own (digital) realities. As far as the social and political implications of computer-networking technology are concerned, Leary predicts that the free information exchange and feedback made possible by the Internet would create a post-political, non-hierarchical cybernetic society \endash a society based on Ecstasy, that is, the experience of individual freedom. \par Leary goes even further and prophesies that the enormous acceleration in technological development we are witnessing right now will in the near future lead to technological breakthroughs (nanotechnology, \ldblquote downloading\rdblquote ) that will enable us to \ldblquote manipulate matter as information,\rdblquote which means that the human form becomes \ldblquote a matter totally determined by individual choice.\rdblquote According to Leary, we have now reached a turning point in human evolution where the next evolutionary step will be under our control. This means we can actually \ldblquote design\rdblquote our futures. For example, we could decide to \ldblquote download\rdblquote our brains into computers and do away with the \ldblquote old flesh\rdblquote (body) all together. Newly discovered technologies such as nanotechnology would open up an unlimited number of choices. As Leary put it, \ldblquote In the near future, what is now taken for granted as the perishable human creature will be a mere historical curiosity, one point amidst unimaginable, multidimensional diversity of form. Individuals [who do not like their existence as electronic life forms] will be free to choose to reassume flesh-and-blood form, constructed for the occasion by the appropriate science\rdblquote (CC 202). \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\fs28 4.7. A critical analysis of the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\fs24\par In this chapter, I argue that Leary was a central figure in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s. I want to show that in his Quantum Psychology theory Leary expresses the most important ideas and beliefs that prevail in this counterculture, and want to critically discuss some of these ideas and beliefs. This chapter is subdivided into four subchapters: \par In the first subchapter (4.7.1.), I shortly describe the most important events in the development of the cybernetic counterculture in chronological order. \par In the second subchapter (4.7.2.), I critically analyze some of the ideas and beliefs that the cybernetic counterculture is based on, by comparing two interesting analyses of the cyberdelic phenomenon: Douglas Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 , which is a very emphatic, rather uncritical approach to the phenomenon and very similar to Leary\rquote s approach; and Mark Dery\rquote s \i Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century\i0 , which is a very critical analysis of the cyberdelic counterculture in which Dery harshly criticizes Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 and New Age visionaries like Leary whose \ldblquote siren song of the nineties technophilia and sixties transcendentalism seduces the public mind with the promise of an end-of-the-century deus ex machina at a time when realistic solutions are urgently needed\rdblquote (Dery 1996: 49). I argue that Leary\rquote s theories are based on exactly the same beliefs as Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 . Dery\rquote s criticism of the beliefs and ideas expressed in Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 uncovers some of the weak points in Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory. This critical analysis of the cyberdelic counterculture and the description of the development of this counterculture (4.7.1) shows that Leary really played a central role in this counterculture and that Leary\rquote s theories perfectly capture the technotopian atmosphere that prevails in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s.\par In the third subchapter (4.7.3.), I show that the blind techno-euphoria that predominates in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s is slowly wearing off because more and more cyber-hippies are realizing that their vision of the \ldblquote cyber-society\rdblquote - a world of intelligent, creative, self-reliant people who have free access to information, all made possible by cybernetic technology - is based on at least two problematic assumptions: First, the feedback and decentralization caused by cybernetic technology has only positive effects, that is, it creates individual freedom. Second, technology does not automatically make us more intelligent, creative and self-reliant. I will discuss these two problematic assumptions.\par In the fourth subchapter (4.7.4.), I criticize Leary\rquote s techno-utopianism by using arguments from Marshall McLuhan\rquote s discourse on technology. I argue that McLuhan never was the technoutopian that Leary and and other contemporary technophiles like to portray.\par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\f1 4.7.1. The evolution of the cybernetic counterculture\par \pard\lang1031\f0\fs20\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\fs24 In the essay \ldblquote Electronica: The True Cyber Culture, \rdblquote Douglas Rushkoff notes that if we trace back the roots of this counterculture we find that the first group of people that praised the computer as a tool of liberation and transcendence were members of bohemian communities in California in the 70s: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 Culturally speaking, it was the California \ldblquote bohemian\rdblquote communities [sic] that first embraced the computer as a tool of artistic and spiritual expression. As early as the mid-1970s, psychedelic renegade Timothy Leary was appearing in documentaries predicting that someday in the future, all of us would be exchanging messages electronically through our \ldblquote word processors.\rdblquote The visionary \ldblquote Whole Earth Review\rdblquote editor Stewart Brand announced to his hippy, environmentalist following that computers should be seen as aids to positive social and spiritual transformation (Rushkoff, Douglas. \ldblquote Electronica: The True Cyber Culture.\rdblquote n. pag. Online. Internet. 29 Aug 1998. Available \cf1\ul\f1 http://www.levity.com/rushkoff/electronica.html\cf0\ulnone\f0 ).\par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj In the 70s, only very few people had access to computers and the Internet - which then was called \ldblquote ARPA-Net\rdblquote - was only for military communication (cf. Dery 1996: 5f.). However, it did not take long until this vision of a society in which all, or at least most of the people are connected electronically became reality. In the early 80s, the computer revolution moved beyond the esoteric subculture of researchers and hobbyists and became a mass culture phenomenon. In 1983, when universities, business companies, and government agencies connected their computers to the Internet, what had been the Arpa Internet mutated into an anarchic global network (cf. ibid.). \par In 1984, science fiction writer William Gibson, in his cyberpunk novel \i Neuromancer\i0 , invented the concept of cyberspace, described by Gibson as a \ldblquote consensual hallucination experienced daily by billions of legitimate operators, in every nation\rdblquote (Gibson 1995: 22). Many young \ldblquote computer-freaks\rdblquote started to believe in Gibson\rquote s cyberpunk vision; and Gibson\rquote s concept of cyberspace finally became reality. As Gibson himself put it, \ldblquote Cyberspace is a consensual hallucination that these people have created. It\rquote s like, with this equipment [computers, virtual reality gear, etc], you can agree to share the same hallucinations. In effect, they\rquote re creating a world. It\rquote s not really a place, it\rquote s not really a space. It\rquote s notional space\rdblquote (quoted in Rucker 1992: 78). \par According to Jon Lebkowsky, a contributing editor of the online magazine \i Hot Wired\i0 , the evolution of the cyberpunk subculture within the vibrant digital culture of today was mediated by two important events: One was the opening of the Internet. The other was the appearance of the first cyberculture magazine \i Mondo 2000\i0 . Lebkowsky explains: \par \par \pard\li705\qj\fs20 The Internet derived much of its ambiance from a strange hybrid of 60s counterculture and 80s libertarianism. \i Mondo 2000\i0 , a glossy periodical that evolved from an earlier neopsychedelic zine [\i High Frontiers\i0 ], incorporated this sociopolitical sensibility and blended it with their own peculiar sense of post-punk irreverence, drugged-up pranksterism, and high style. The result was a new cultural trend, or at least the media-generated illusion of one.\par It was 1989. Computers were seen as tools of High Geekdom. \i Mondo\i0 , however, portrayed the new technology as sexy, hip, and powerfully subversive. And as Captain Picard might say, they made it so.\par \pard\li708\qj It was Bart Nagel\rquote s unique computer-enhanced graphic style that pushed \i Mondo 2K\i0 [this is how its fans call it] over the top, making it something of a phenomenon in the early 90s. However, the real meat was in the cheerfully irreverent exploration of nascent technoculture and the evolving computer underground from the perspectives of the writers/editors, whose handles were R.U. Sirius, St. Jude, and Queen Mu. Besides displaying strangeness and charm, early M\i ondo\i0 was the only popular representation of the hacker ethic, described by author Andrew Ross as \ldblquote libertarian and cryptoanarchist in its right-to-know principles and its advocacy of decentralized knowledge. [It] asserts the basic right to all users to free access to all information. [...]\rdblquote (quoted in Kroker 1997: 16).\par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\par It should be mentioned here that Leary was a contributing editor of \i Mondo 2000\i0 . Many of Leary\rquote s essays about the cyberpunks and the subversive potential of computers (the most important of these essays can be found in \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 ) were first published in \i Mondo 2000\i0 . \par \i Mondo 2000 \i0 does not only report about computer hackers and the Internet. In \i Mondo 2000\i0 , we find articles about smart drugs (legal drugs that are supposed to enhance your intelligence), virtual reality, electronic music, chaos theory, artificial life, nanotechnology, brain implants, designer aphrodisiacs, psychedelics, techno-erotic paganism, etc. If we look at these different topics we see that \i Mondo\i0 tries to unite the scientific culture and the nonscientific culture. In \i Mondo \i0 the technical world and the underground world of popular culture and street level anarchy are converging. Another thing we can see if we look at these different topics is, that this cultural phenomenon\i \i0 that \i Mondo\i0 tries to make us aware of actually encompasses a considerable amount of subcultures, among them computer hackers, \ldblquote ravers\rdblquote (people who regularly go to all-night electronic dance parties known as \ldblquote raves\rdblquote ), technopagans (this subculture combines neopaganism with digital technology), and New Age technophiles.\par Now what do all of these different subcultures that express their views in \i Mondo 2000 \i0 have in common? This question leads us to the discussion part of this chapter. \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\f1 4.7.2. Deus ex machina: a deadly phantasy?\par \pard\f0\fs20\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\fs24 In his cyber-hippie travelogue, \i Cyberia: Life in the Trenches of Hyperspace\i0 , Douglas Rushkoff gives a comprehensive survey of the subcultures discussed in \i Mondo\i0 . Rushkoff collectively calls these counterculture Cyberia, or the cyberian counterculture of the 90s. According to Rushkoff (who was influenced by Leary\rquote s theories very much), there are at least two things that all of the cyberian subcultures have in common: \par \pard{\pntext\f0 1.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart1\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 the belief that we can create our own realities, that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of our minds.\par \pard{\pntext\f0 2.\tab}{\*\pn\pnlvlbody\pnf0\pnindent360\pnstart2\pndec{\pntxta.}} \fi-360\li360\sl360\slmult1\qj\tx360 the belief that technology can help us to create our own realities and break free from all limits (cf. Rushkoff 1995: 3-7). \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj (I decided to use the same phrasing as in the comparison of Leary\rquote s theories because I want to show that, apart from a few small details, Rushkoff and Leary share the same worldview.)\par Like Leary, Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians see the world as one big self-organizing chaotic system, as one big fractal which is governed by orderly rules. According to Rushkoff, we are not able to fully understand these rules and to control this chaotic system because the system is so complex. The only thing we know is that our world is entirely more interdependent than we have previously understood. Like Leary, Rushkoff argues that what goes on inside any one person\rquote s head is reflected, in some manner, on every other level of reality. So any individual being, through feedback and iteration, has the ability to redesign reality. If you change, the world changes. (cf. ibid. 23). According to Rushkoff, there are different ways to experience the fractal nature of the universe, or - to use Rushkoff\rquote s terminology \endash there are different ways to access Cyberia, or \ldblquote cyberspace.\rdblquote \ldblquote Cyberspace can be accessed through drugs, dance, spiritual techniques, chaos maths, and pagan rituals,\rdblquote Rushkoff explains (ibid. 3), adding that,\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs20\par \pard\li709\qj Ultimately, the personal computer and its associated technologies may be the best access point to Cyberia. They even serve as a metaphor for cyberians who have nothing to do with computers but who look at the net as a model for human interaction. It allows for communication without the limitations of time or space, personality or body, religion or nationality. The vast computer-communications network is a fractal approach to human consciousness. It provides the means for complex and immediate feedback and iteration, and is even self-similar in its construction, with giant networks mirroring BBSs [Electronic Bulletin Board Services], mirroring users\rquote own systems, circuit boards, and components that themselves mirror each participant\rquote s neural biocircuitry. In further self-similarity, the monitors on some of these computers depict complex fractal patterns mirroring the psychedelics-induced hallucinations of their designers, and graphing \endash for the first time \endash representations of existence as a chaotic system of feedback and iteration (ibid. 37). \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par If we read these two quotations we see that, for Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians, the term \ldblquote cyberspace\rdblquote (and its synonym \ldblquote Cyberia\rdblquote ) does not only refer to computer networks and data banks that are experienced by computer users as a boundless space. Fore them, the \ldblquote hypertext-universe\rdblquote of the Internet is only one manifestation of a mystical world where the limits of space, time, and body are transcended. Rushkoff explains: \ldblquote Cyberia is the place a businessperson goes when involved in a phone conversation, the place a shamanic warrior goes when travelling out of body, the place an \lquote acid house\rquote dancer goes when experiencing the bliss of a techno-acid trance. Cyberia is the place alluded to by the mystical teachings of every religion, the theoretical tangents of every science, and the wildest speculations of every imagination\rdblquote (Rushkoff 1995: 5). According to Rushkoff, cyberspace, or Cyberia, is a \ldblquote place\rdblquote (a realm of consciousness) where we can create our own realities, a world where we can be anyone or anything we want to be. Psychedelic drugs and computers are seen as technologies that help us to access and explore this strange hallucinatory world.\par Like Leary\rquote s cyberpunks, Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians believe that technologies such as psychedelic drugs and computers are a part of the continuing evolution of the human species towards greater intelligence, empathy, and awareness. To them, science/technology is the same as magic; spiritual is digital (another similarity to Leary\rquote s Quantum psychology). They all share the one vision that technology can help us to break free from limits of any sort, metaphysical as well as physical, and will finally lead us to enlightenment. Like Leary\rquote s cyberpunks, Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians believe that technological development is in some kind of asymptotic acceleration. As psychedelic philosopher Terence McKenna, on of the main figures in Cyberia put it: \par \par \pard\li708\qj\fs20 Nano-technology, psychedelic chemistry, the Internet, cloning, [...] \endash all of these things synergizing each other are producing very rapidly a world which is almost incomprehensible to most people. There is no reason to suppose that this process is going to slow down. [...] At any point there could be a breakthrough \endash cold fusion, real extraterrestrial contact, a nanotechnological assembler, a telepathic drug, a longevity drug that stops aging. It could come from any of so many directions that I\rquote m sure we will be surprised\rdblquote (Eisner, \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 , Vol 3, Issue 1: 9).\par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj Rushkoff and McKenna predict that technology - by electronically and psychically connecting all the people on this planet and thereby creating one big collective consciousness - will help us to create the necessary conditions for humankind\rquote s \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace,\rdblquote a hyperdimensional shift into a timeless non-personalized reality, which is the eschatological endpoint of the cyberian vision of the future of humanity (cf. Rushkoff 1995: 147). In the introduction to \i Cyberia\i0 , Terence McKenna (who in the media is presented as Leary\rquote s heir apparent) describes this \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace\rdblquote as follows:\par \par \pard\li705\qj\fs20 We\rquote re closing distance with the most profound event that planetary ecology can encounter, which is the freeing of life from the chrysalis of matter. And it\rquote s never happened before \endash I mean the dinosaurs didn\rquote t do this, nor did the prokaryotes emerging. No. This takes a billion years of forward moving evolution to get to the place where information can detach itself from the material matrix and then look back on a cast-off mode of being as it rises into a higher dimension (ibid. 7).\par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj McKenna speculates that this \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace\rdblquote may usher in a cybernetic Garden Eden where \ldblquote all of the technological appurtenances of the present world have been shrunk to the point where they have disappeared into [nature] and scattered as grains of sand along the beaches of this planet and we all will live naked in paradise but only a thought away is all the cybernetic connectedness and ability to deliver manufactured goods and data that this world possesses\rdblquote (quoted in Dery 1996: 9f.).\par Rushkoff and McKenna do not explain exactly how the interconnection of all human beings will give birth to a \ldblquote planetary consciousness\rdblquote so that this great leap into hyperspace can take place, but it has something to do with chaos theory \endash with the idea that order can arise from chaos, and the biological phenomenon that previously disconnected elements reach a critical point where they suddenly cooperate to form a higher-level entity. It should be mentioned here that Rushkoff\rquote s vision of the future of mankind is a synthesis created from the basic concepts of a number of scientific and esoteric theories: \i Chaos theory\i0\rquote s premise that order can spring from seemingly random phenomena, James Lovelock\rquote s \i Gaia hypothesis\i0 (in which Loveleock suggests that the earth is a big self-organizing system), Teilhard de Chardin\rquote s concept of the \ldblquote\i noosphere\i0\rdblquote (which could be defined as a combined field of all human consciousness) , McLuhan\rquote s concept of a \i Global Village\i0 , and psychedelic philosopher Terence McKenna\rquote s \i Timewave theory\i0 , in which McKenna suggests that this \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace\rdblquote (the culmination of the asymptotic acceleration of technological development, the end of history and linear time) will take place in the year 2012. (For further explanations and references see Dery 1996: 43-48.) \par The reader might ask him-/herself what it will feel like at the end of linear time when we all leap into hyperspace. According to McKenna, the only thing that comes close to how human experience in hyperspace will feel like, is a DMT trip (cf. ibid. 90). DMT is by far the strongest psychedelic drug. One user in \i Cyberia\i0 says, \ldblquote It\rquote s like taking every LSD experience you\rquote ve ever had and putting them at a head of a pin\rdblquote (ibid. 87). Rushkoff explains that experimentation with DMT and virtual reality could be seen as a preparation for the coming hyperdimensional shift into hyperspace and can \ldblquote help cyberians to discriminate between what is linear, temporary, and arbitrary, and what is truly hyperdimensional\rdblquote (ibid.). (Leary also believed that experimentation with DMT and LSD is a good way of preparing oneself for the wild and chaotic future that lies ahead.)\par I now want to come back to the concept that reality is a construction of our minds, because, in my opinion, this is the key idea that underlies Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 . Just like Leary, Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians believe that we can learn to consciously change our realities. Rushkoff, like Leary, tries to back this belief by referring his readers to quantum theory which teaches that \ldblquote just becoming aware of something changes it\rdblquote (ibid. 23). We only need the right technologies (psychedelics, computers, etc) that enable us to alter our perception of the world. The psychedelic experience, for example, leads cyberians to conclude that \ldblquote they have the ability to reshape the experience of reality and thus \endash if observer and observed are one \endash the reality itself\rdblquote (ibid.) This means that if we alter our perception of the world the society we live in automatically changes as well. This is the cyberian\rquote s alternative to politics. Change your consciousness and the world will change automatically. \par According to Rushkoff, the idea that reality is an arbitrary construction is something which strongly connects the cyberian counterculture of the 90s with the hippies of the 60s. Rushkoff points out that the hippies were the first generation that realized that reality is an arbitrary construction. The hippies would have handed on their knowledge to the cyberian counterculture of the 90s that now continues their mission. As Rushkoff puts it, \ldblquote [T]he single most important contribution of the 1960s and the psychedelic era to popular culture is the notion that we have chosen our reality arbitrarily. The mission of the cyberian counterculture of the 1990s, armed with new technologies, familiar with cyberspace and daring enough to explore unmapped realms of consciousness, is to rechoose reality consciously and purposefully\rdblquote (ibid. 6f.).\par Cultural critic Mark Dery agrees with Rushkoff that the 90s are in a way a return of the 60s. (We will see that this is actually the only point on which Dery and Rushkoff agree.) In \i Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century\i0 , Dery writes that,\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 The return of the sixties [...] is at the heart of the cyberdelic wing of fringe computer culture. Not surprisingly, many of cyberdelia\rquote s media icons are familiar faces from the sixties: \i No magazine cover story on the phenomenon is complete without the septuagenarian Timothy Leary, admonishing readers to \ldblquote turn on, boot up, jack in\rdblquote and proclaiming that the \ldblquote PC is the LSD of the 1990s\rdblquote\i0 [my italics], or Steward Brand, the former Merry Prankster[...] Other prominent cyberdelic spokespeople, such as the \i Mondo 2000\i0 founders Queen Mu and R. U. Sirius [...] are steeped in the Northern California counterculture of the sixties. [...]\par Cyberdelia reconciles the transcendentalist impulses of the sixites with the infomania of the nineties. In cyberdelia, the values, attitudes, and street styles of the Haight-Asbury/Berkeley counterculture intersect with the technological innovations and esoteric traditions of Silicon Valley. The cartoon opposites of disheveled, dope-smoking \ldblquote head\rdblquote and buttoned-down engineering student, so irreconcilable in the sixties, come together in [...] Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians (Dery 1996: 22f.). \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par This quotation shows that Leary really played a central role in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s. It shows that the media made Leary an icon of the cyberdelic counterculture. The media enabled Leary to attract many young people to the subversive potential of the computer and the Internet.\par Dery points out that, increasingly, the media image of the \ldblquote Generation Xers\rdblquote who predominate in high-tech subcultures is that of the cyber-hippie, or, in England, the \ldblquote zippie\rdblquote (\ldblquote Zen-inspired pagan professional\rdblquote ). Cyber-hippies, or zippies, are a combination of sixites children and nineties techno people. They are portrayed in the media as smart young people who dress in \ldblquote cyberdelic softwear\rdblquote (T-shirts printed with squirming sperm, leggins adorned with scutting spiders, jewelry fashioned from computer parts, belled jester caps that are popular at raves, etc) and \ldblquote meditate on psychedelic mandalas like the \i New Electric Acid Experience\i0 video advertised in \i Inner Technologies\i0 , a mail order catalogue of \lquote tools for the expansion of consciousness\rquote\rdblquote (ibid. 23f.). In addition, cyber-hippies like to boost their brain power with smart drugs and \ldblquote mind machines\rdblquote - headphone-and-goggle devices that \ldblquote flash stroboscopic pulses at the user\rquote s closed eyes, accompanied by synchronized sound patterns, [...inducing] trancelike states characterized by deep relaxation, vivid daydreams, and greater receptivity toward autohypnotic suggestion for behavior changes\rdblquote (ibid. 24).\par What Dery shows is that the cyber-hippies of the 90s are a generation of young people that has found a way to live with technology \endash something the anti-tech, back-to-the-land hippies never accomplished. As Dery puts it, \ldblquote What distinguishes the cyberdelic culture of the nineties from psychedelic culture, more than anything else, is its ecstatic embrace of technology\rdblquote (ibid.). According to Dery, the cyber-hippies see themselves as the complete opposite of the anti-tech, anti-science hippies and dismiss the 60s counterculture as \ldblquote a return to nature that ended in disaster.\rdblquote However, there is one thing that people who characterize the psychedelic counterculture of the 60s as intractably anti-technological forget to take into consideration, namely that, \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 The archetypal hippie experience was not dancing naked in a field of daisies, but tripping at an acid rock concert. The psychedelic sound-and-light show was as much a technological as a Dionysian rite, from the feedback-drenched electric soundtrack to the signature visual effects (created with film, slides, strobes, and overhead projectors) to the LSD that switched on the whole experience (ibid. 26).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par Dery argues that the inhabitants of the 60s counterculture - exemplified by Leary or Ken Kesey and his Merry Pranksters - may have dreamed of enlightenment, but \ldblquote theirs was the \lquote plug-and-play\rquote nirvana of the \lquote gadget-happy American\rquote \endash attained not through years of Siddhartalike questioning but instantaneously, by chemical means, amidst the sensory assault of a high-tech happening\rdblquote (Dery 1996: 29). He refers to Theordore Roszak who, in \i The Making of a Counter Culture\i0 , points out that, \ldblquote [...] the Learyite article of faith that the key to cosmic consciousness and sweeping societal change could be found in a chemical concoction sprang from a uniquely American faith in technology (Dery 1996: 25). (I think that Leary would not object to the quotation above.)\par What Dery tries to show with this excursion back to the 60s is that, from a countercultural point of view, the 90s are really a return of the 60s. According to Dery, the cyber-hippies of the 90s have taken over many of the values and beliefs of the 60s counterculture and integrated them into their worldview \endash for example, the value of individual freedom and the belief that technology (chemistry) can help us attain freedom and enlightenment. Other ideas such as the ideal of living in perfect harmony with nature or Marx\rquote s program to improve the social and economic conditions in our decadent (i.e., capitalistic) society, however, would have been dismissed as irrelevant to the 90s. As far as the difference between the hippies\rquote and the cyber-hippies\rquote attitudes towards politics is concerned, Dery points out that in spite of the fact that many hippies were only interested in taking drugs, politics still played an important role in the 60s counterculture (the antiwar movement, the civil rights struggle, black power, the New Left, feminism). In contrast to the hippies, the cyber-hippies of the 90s do not care about politics at all. Dery quotes cultural critic Todd Gitlin who, in \i The Sixties. Years of Hope, Days of Rage\i0 , notes that, \par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 [In the 60s, there] were tensions galore between the radical idea of political strategy \endash with discipline, organization, commitment to results \i out there\i0 in the distance \endash and the countercultural idea of living life to the fullest, \i right here\i0 , for oneself [...] and the rest of the world be dammed (which it was already). Radicalism\rquote s tradition had one of its greatest voices in Marx, whose oeuvre is a series of glosses on the theme: change the world! The main battalions of the counterculture \endash Leary, the Pranksters [...] \endash were descended from Emerson, Thoureau, Rimbaud: change consciousness, change life! [...]\par [Countercultural phrasemakers such as Leary] were antipolitical purists for whom politics was game playing, a bad trip, a bringdown, a bummer. Indeed all social institutions were games... The antidote to destructive games was \endash more playful games (ibid. 23). \fs24 \i\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\i0 \par Dery argues that this \ldblquote freak-politico dichotomy\rdblquote of the 60s counterculture is resolved in the cyber-hippie counterculture, by \ldblquote jettisoning \lquote the radical idea of political strategy\rquote and updating \lquote the countercultural idea of living life to the fullest, \i right here\i0 , for oneself\rquote\rdblquote (ibid.). According to Dery, in the 90s counterculture the victory of the countercultural tradition over political radicalism is complete. As Dery puts it, \ldblquote [M]ovement politics or organized activism of virtually any sort are pass\'e9 among the cyber-hippies, for whom being boring is \i the\i0 cardinal sin and \lquote hijacking technology for personal empowerment, fun and games\rquote the be-all and end-all of human existence. After all, \lquote sport, pleasure, and adventure are the only logical responses to a fractal universe\rquote\rdblquote (ibid. 32f.). \par The last sentence of the quotation above is an insinuation to a passage from Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia\i0 , in which Rushkoff writes that, \ldblquote [To the cyberians], the truth of Cyberia is a sea of waves \endash chaotic, maybe, but a playground more than anything else. [To them], sport, pleasure, and adventure are the only logical responses to a fractal universe [...] a world free of physical constraints, boring predictability, and linear events\rdblquote (Rushkoff 1995: 181f.). \par Dery harshly criticizes the cyberian worldview for its escapism and naivet\'e9. He argues that Rushkoff\rquote s \ldblquote fuzzily defined program for personal and social change\rdblquote \endash the idea that we have chosen our reality arbitrarily, and that the whole world is one big fractal which changes when the individual mind changes \endash bears a distinct resemblance to Freud\rquote s concept of the \ldblquote omnipotence of thoughts,\rdblquote which Dery describes as \ldblquote the primitive mode of thought that assumes a magical correspondence between mental life and the external, physical world. Primitives, wrote Freud, \lquote believe they can alter the external world by mere thinking\rquote\rdblquote (Dery 1996: 42). To deny the existence of an objective physical reality and to place one\rquote s faith in the liquid indeterminacy of a \ldblquote quantum reality\rdblquote would be naive. In Dery\rquote s opinion the cyberians\rquote escape into cyberspace where they feel liberated from the limitations of space, time, and body is just a form of detachment that has nothing to do with freedom. Dery advises Rushkoff and his fellow cyberians that they would do well to heed media philosopher Walter Kirn\rquote s admonition that \ldblquote [w]hat the [cyberians] appear fated to learn from their ventures into pure electronic consciousness is that ultimate detachment is not the same as freedom, escape is no substitute for liberation and rapture isn\rquote t happiness. The sound-and-light show at the end of time, longed for by these turned-on nerds, seems bound to disappoint\rdblquote (ibid. 49).\par In contrast to Rushkoff who, like his fellow cyberians, believes that technology can help us to transcend all limits, Dery is very skeptical about the cyberians\rquote uncritical, euphoric embrace of technology. He criticizes Rushkoff\rquote s uncritical approach to the ideas and beliefs that prevail in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s. \par \par \pard\li709\qj\fs20 [...] Rushkoff doesn\rquote t explore, he \ldblquote groks\rdblquote \endash a sixties verb meaning to instantly, intuitively apprehend. It is a method of uncritical inquiry appropriate to the Northern Californian corner of fringe computer culture he traverses, which is nothing if not defiantly antirational. In it, an utterly uncritical embrace of the proto-New Age aspects of sixties counterculture has been freed from the shackles of back-to-nature romanticism and hitched to the liberatory promise of technology (mind machines, smart drugs, BBSs, virtual reality).\par [...] Rushkoff\rquote s cyberians give voice to nearly all of cyberdelic culture\rquote s received truths, foremost among them the techno-pagan axiom that rationalism and intuition, materialism and mysticism, science and magic are converging. [...] Rushkoff contends that Western reason, with its emphasis on linear, rational thought, is unable to make sense of the \ldblquote overall fractal equation for the postmodern experience,\rdblquote where the \ldblquote rules of linear reality no longer apply\rdblquote (ibid. 41f.).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par The reader might have noticed that Dery\rquote s criticism of Rushkoff\rquote s \i Cyberia \i0 could just as well be directed at Leary\rquote s Quantum Psychology theory and his concept of the cyber-society. Like Rushkoff, Leary believes that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is an arbitrary construction and that Western reason (Newtonian physics, etc) is unable to make sense of the chaotic, fractal, non-linear world we inhabit. Both Leary and Rushkoff present technology as something which is absolutely, 100% positive. They both see technology as an \ldblquote extension\rdblquote of the human being.\par As far as Leary\rquote s and Rushkoff\rquote s visions of the future are concerned, they are both based on the believe that technology will help us to realize the mystical dream of rising beyond the \ldblquote prison of flesh.\rdblquote Both Leary and Rushkoff predict that we will soon reach the final stage of evolution, the moment when \ldblquote information can detach itself from the material matrix.\rdblquote Also Leary\rquote s and Rushkoff\rquote s explanations of how this techno-mystical dream will become true are practically the same. Like McKenna in his Timewave theory, they both argue that the exponential acceleration of technological development we are witnessing at present will lead to unimaginable breakthroughs: \ldblquote downloading\rdblquote (that is, mapping of the idiosyncratic neural networks of our minds onto computer memory, thereby rendering the body superfluous), the nanotechnological assembler (which could help us to create machines that stop our bodies from aging), etc. Both Leary and Rushkoff advise their readers to prepare themselves for the \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace\rdblquote that Terence McKenna predicts in his Timewave theory \endash a world in which all limits are transcended, a world of total freedom. (It should be mentioned that here freedom is not defined in terms of social liberties but in morphological, neurological, and genetic terms. Freedom is freedom of form.)\par In contrast to Leary, Rushkoff, and McKenna whose main concern is to prepare us for the \ldblquote posthuman liftoff from biology,\rdblquote Dery tries to bring us back to the ground: \ldblquote Posthumanist visions of the mind unbound [...] are a wish-fulfillment fantasy of the end of limits, situated (at least for now) in a world of limits. The envisioned liftoff from biology and gravity [...] by borging [from cyborg = cybernetic organism], morphing [the ability to change one\rquote s form], and \lquote downloading,\rquote or launching our minds beyond all bounds is itself held fast by the gravity of the social and political realities, moral issues, and environmental conditions of the moment,\rdblquote (Dery 1996: 15). In the last chapter of \i Escape Velocity\i0 , \ldblquote Cyborging the Body Politic: Obsolete Bodies and Posthuman Beings,\rdblquote Dery refutes the cyberian assumption that consciousness is the result of wholly material processes and is therefore reproducible by technical means. His arguments taken from scientists of different fields try to prove that \ldblquote downloading\rdblquote is theoretically impossible (cf. ibid. 318). Dery makes us aware that the cyberdelic vision of a techno-mystical apotheosis in the \ldblquote there and then\rdblquote \endash like so many other millenarian prophecies before it \endash only diverts public discourse from the political and socioeconomic inequities of the \ldblquote here and now.\rdblquote Blindly placing one\rquote s faith in a \ldblquote theology of the ejector seat,\rdblquote at a time when realistic solutions are urgently needed, would be a risky endgame. Dery points out that \ldblquote the cyberians\rquote otherworldly trapdoor assumes various guises, among them the wiring of the human race into a collective consciousness, the technopagan ability to dream up a \ldblquote designer reality\rdblquote though a judicious application of the knowledge that \ldblquote we have chosen our reality arbitrarily, and the \ldblquote chaos attractor at the end of time [i.e., the \ldblquote great leap into hyperspace,\rdblquote \ldblquote the freeing of life from the chrysalis of matter\rdblquote ]\rdblquote (ibid. 49). \par In truth, the cyberdelic rhetoric would represent what media philosopher Walter Kirn has called \ldblquote an eruption of high-tech milleniarism \endash a fin de si\'e8cle schizoid break induced by sitting too long at the screen\rdblquote (ibid.). The beliefs expressed in \i Cyberia\i0 would be textbook examples of what historian Leo Marx calls \ldblquote the rhetoric of the technological sublime,\rdblquote hymns to progress that rise \ldblquote like froth on a tide of exuberant self-regard, sweeping over all misgivings, problems and contradictions\rdblquote (cf. ibid. 316). \par As far as the cyberian dream of \ldblquote rising beyond the old flesh\rdblquote (body) is concerned, Dery argues that it is dangerous to see the brain/mind as an object separating the body from the person/subject that lives in it. He wants to bring us back to our senses, to remind everyone of us that he/she lives in a body. Dery warns us that if we do not keep this subjective kind of body sense in mind as we negotiate our technoculture then we will objectify ourselves to death (cf. ibid. 311). He quotes cultural critic Donna Haraway who admonishes us that any transcendentalist ideology that promises a way of transcending the body (i.e., a way of denying immortality) contains the seeds of a \ldblquote self-fulfilling apocalypse.\rdblquote Haraway argues that, \ldblquote [What we need, more than ever,] is a deep sense of the fragility of the lives that we\rquote re leading \endash that we really do die, that we really do wound each other, that the Earth is really finite, that there aren\rquote t any planets out there that we know of we can live on, that escape velocity [i.e., the vision of a techno-mystical apotheosis in the there and then] is a deadly fantasy\rdblquote (ibid. 17). \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\f1 4.7.3. \lang1033 T\lang1031 his trip is over \par \pard\f0\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033 The techno-euphoria that prevails in the cyberdelic counterculture seems to be slowly wearing off. More and more cyberians are realizing that the PC, the Internet, and other new technologies did not really bring the social, political, and personal changes they thought they would. Even R. U. Sirius, who used to be an euphoric spokesman of cyberculture, has finally realized that the visions of the cyber-society and the \ldblquote liftoff from biology and gravity\rdblquote have blinded us to the real problems on this planet. As Sirius put it:\par \par \pard\li703\qj\fs20 [A]nybody who doesn\rquote t believe that we\rquote re trapped hasn\rquote t taken a good look around. We\rquote re trapped in a sort of mutating multinational corporate oligarchy that\rquote s not about to go away. We\rquote re trapped by the limitations of our species. We\rquote re trapped in time. At the same time identity, politics, and ethics have long turned liquid. [...]\par Cyberculture (a meme that I\rquote m at least partly responsible for generating, incidentally) has emerged as a gleeful apologist for this kill-the-poor trajectory of the Republican revolution. You find it all over \i Wired\i0 [an online magazine] \endash this mix of chaos theory and biological modeling that is somehow interpreted as scientific proof of the need to devolve and decentralize the social welfare state while also deregulating and empowering the powerful, autocratic, multinational corporations. You\rquote ve basically got the breakdown of nation states into global economies simultaneously with the atomization of individuals or their balkanization into disconnected sub-groups, because digital technology conflates space while decentralizing communication and attention. The result is a clear playing field for a mutating corporate oligarchy, which is what we have. I mean, people think it\rquote s really liberating because the old industrial ruling class has been liquefied and it\rquote s possible for young players to amass extraordinary instant dynasties. But it\rquote s savage and inhuman. Maybe the wired elite think that\rquote s hip. But then don\rquote t go around crying about crime in the streets or pretending to be concerned with ethics (quoted in Kroker 1997: 20-23).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par For R. U. Sirius, the techno-euphoria is gone. This trip is over. Cyberpunk is absorbed into the mainstream. The real problems of our material world are still here. To deny these problems would be futile (cf. ibid.). It seems that we are back to normal again. This means we will have to deal with the real problems, discuss politics and ethics again. Designer realities are fun but we have to be aware of the fact that they are just an escape from the \i real\i0 world. In our real world freedom means hard work. Cyberspace, like psychedelics, seems to be a dead end. It is just not enough to philosophize about chaos theory, quantum physics and \ldblquote downloading\rdblquote and wait until someday, perhaps, the world will adjust itself to one\rquote s cosmology.\par It seems that Leary\rquote s concept of the cyber-society \endash a postpolitical, non-hierarchical society made possible by cybernetic technology, in which the computer-literate, super-intelligent, open-minded, change-oriented, self-reliant, irreverent free-thinker is the norm and the person who is not internetted and does not think for him-/herself and questions authority is the \ldblquote problem person\rdblquote (cf. PE 5) \endash will always remain an utopian dream because it is based on two problematic assumptions: \par First of all, Leary suggested that the feedback, decentralization, and connectedness created by communication-networking-technologies has only positive effects, that is, it creates individual freedom and weakens the power of the government. Leary forgot to take into consideration that decentralization is a double edged sword. It slowly dissolves old authoritarian hierarchical political structures (or so it is claimed) while at the same time creating a \ldblquote playing field for a mutating corporate oligarchy.\rdblquote Not only the \ldblquote good guys\rdblquote (the cyberpunks) are using the electronic media; the \ldblquote bad guys\rdblquote (the multinational corporations, politicians, etc) are using them as well, and they very well know how to manipulate people. The multinational corporations, for example, very well know how to program people to believe that you can only be free if you have the newest technology. Freedom means having the fastest computer with modem, a satellite dish on your roof, a cellular phone, a video recorder, etc. And people really believe that they can buy freedom. Even Leary himself tried to convince us that \ldblquote freedom in any country is measured perfectly by the percentage of Personal Computers in the hands of individuals\rdblquote (CC 45). \par Like Leary, the multinational corporations promise us a cybernetic paradise, a world in which all limits are transcended. The AT&T \ldblquote You Will\rdblquote campaign, for example, is such a promise. In \i Escape Velocity\i0 , Mark Dery describes the AT&T \ldblquote You Will\rdblquote campaign as follows:\par \tab\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs20 In AT&T\rquote s corporate brand TV spots, all is sweetness and light. \ldblquote Have you ever opened doors with the sound of your voice?\rdblquote asks a familiar voice, over a countrified jingle that conjures the wide, open territories of the electronic frontier. \ldblquote You will.\rdblquote A young woman steps out of an elevator, her arms full, and her apartment doors unlocks at her command. [...]\par Brought to you by the mother of all communication companies, AT&T\rquote s future is, in the best tradition of technological Utopias, a luminous place, not far off. [...] The golden glow that suffuses the spacious interiors in the spots \endash light made gauzy with the aid of fog machines \endash sentimentalizes corporate dreams of electronic interconnectedness by premisting the viewer\rquote s eyes. Moreover, it lends AT&T\rquote s vision of things to come an almost metaphysical air, drawing on the long-standing equation of the luminous and the numinous \endash an equation that is at least as old as the seventeenth-century poet Henry Vaughn\rquote s evocation of the ultimate virtual reality, the afterlife (\ldblquote They are all gone into the world of light!\rdblquote ) and as recent as the radiant aliens in \i Close Encounters of the Third Kind\i0 (Dery 1996: 11).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par Oddly enough, the laptop computers, cellular phones, videophones, etc which multinational corporations like AT&T have brought us seem not to have lightened our burden as workers because \ldblquote in a world where \lquote we are all connected\rquote [...] the office intrudes on our vacations, the workday stretches into our evenings: Video screens, phones, and laptop jacks convert every seat in the Boeing 777 into an airborne office; the pagers and cellular phones provided by one resort in Vail, Colorado, turn downtime on the ski lifts into worktime\rdblquote (ibid. 12). It is frightening how easily our privacy can be invaded in the digital age. \par Nonetheless, many people in the Western World believe that television, cellular phones, computers, the Internet, etc make them more and more independent from authorities, and some people still hope that soon \ldblquote superintelligent\rdblquote machines will do all the work for them so they just have to lean back and \ldblquote enjoy the show.\rdblquote It is not surprising that the governments of the Western world do not lift a finger to change this delusive belief. Technotopian stories about the future do not weaken their power, quite to the contrary. Computers, the Internet, and all the other new technologies are \ldblquote opium for the people;\rdblquote technology keeps people happy and entertained. Why rise up against the government if you have TV (200 channels or more), Internet, Game Boys, cyber sex, etc?\par The second problematic assumption that Leary\rquote s concept of the cyber-society is based on is that the increase of intelligence is a logical consequence of the enormous acceleration of technological development we are witnessing at present. Leary calls this the \ldblquote law of acceleration:\rdblquote The faster the technology, the faster the speed of thought (cf. CC inside cover-page). In \ldblquote Our Brain\rdblquote (1991)\i , \i0 for example, Leary states that \ldblquote [i]n just the last ten years, our species has multiplied the ability to use our brains by a thousandfold\rdblquote (CC 35) and \ldblquote [t]he next uncontrollable fifteen years (1995-2010) will [even] accelerate this dizzy explosion of brain power\rdblquote (CC 82). According to Leary, our brains are quickly learning to adapt to the speed of computers:\par \par \fs20\tab Speed is addictive, and evolutionary.\par \pard\li708\sl360\slmult1\qj Individuals who work intimately with computational machinery find they grow quickly accustomed to rapid interactive responses, exulting in the quick succession of events in the culminative composition of growth of work, in the embodiment of the structure of one\rquote s mind in the machine. Being forced to use a slower computer after addiction to rapid response speed is established is mentally excruciating in the extreme. It seems that there is no return from an accelerated frame of mind (DD 39).\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par The invincible optimist Leary predicted that by 2008 the super-bright, creative, imaginative, self-reliant computer adept will be the norm in our Information Society and the person who does not want to be internetted and connected will be the \ldblquote problem person\rdblquote (cf. CC 83f.).\par The question arises: Do computers, the Internet, and other new technologies really make people more creative and intelligent? Do computers really teach us to think faster? Can our brains keep up with the speed of the electronic media? Cultural critics Arthur and Marilouise Kroker, for example, do not share Leary\rquote s optimistic belief that faster technologies teach us to think faster and that by 2008 the super-bright, self-reliant computer adept will be the norm in our cybernetic society. The Krokers are pessimistic about the future of our digital culture. They argue that we are on \ldblquote a fast trip to digital delirium\rdblquote because \ldblquote we have not escaped and will never overcome the fatal destiny of the law of reversal\rdblquote (which is exactly the opposite of Leary\rquote s \ldblquote law of acceleration\rdblquote ):\par \par \pard\li705\sl360\slmult1\qj\i\fs20 [T]he faster the tech, the slower the speed of thought\i0 ... the more accelerated the culture, the slower the rate of social change... the quicker the digital composition, the slower the political reflection... the more apparent the external speed, the more real the internal slowness... delirious speed and anxious slowness...a split reality... accelerating digital effects are neutralized by deaccelerating special human effects... digital reality spins out of control, human reality slow-burns back to earth... speed bodies and slow vision... speed flesh and slow bones... speed web and slow riot... the slow mirror of speed [italics mine](Kroker 1997: x)\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\fs24\par In contrast to Leary who suggested that \ldblquote our bored brains love \lquote overload\rquote\rdblquote (CC 15), the Krokers argue that information overload (caused by computers, the electronic media, etc) numbs our brains so we cannot think clearly any more. The brain\rquote s self-protective reaction to information overload is that it \ldblquote shuts down.\rdblquote As the Krokers put it in \i Digital Delirium\i0 : [T]he tyranny of information overload produce[s] a numbed culture that shuts down for self-protection\rdblquote (Kroker 1997: xiii).\par The Krokers\rquote law of reversal suggests that we are caught in some kind of vicious circle. We invent faster technologies to be able to meet the demands of our accelerating culture (our culture demands that we are able to think faster and faster, do work faster and faster, etc). These faster technologies which help us to do things faster, however, produce an even more accelerated culture. This means that we have to keep inventing faster technologies. The problem is that the human brain cannot cope with the growing speed of our culture. The result is: \ldblquote Speed images, but slow eyes. [...] Speed media, but slow communication. Speed talk, but no thought\rdblquote (ibid. ix).\par \i Digital Delirium\i0 (published 1997) is a counter-blast to the blast of techno-utopianism that the 90s began with. The Krokers intention is to bring techno-utopians like Leary and McKenna back down to the ground from their \ldblquote digital high.\rdblquote They want to make people aware that the computer can be a dangerous and highly addictive drug because it gives you the feeling that you are omnipotent and know everything when, in fact, you know nothing. As long as you are \ldblquote high\rdblquote (numbed by the dizzying speed and information overload produced by computers) all problems seem to be solved (because the real problems are \ldblquote screened out\rdblquote so you are not aware of them). That is why it is hard to resist the seduction of computers. Leary himself admitted that \ldblquote computers are more addictive than heroin\rdblquote\f1\fs20 \f0\fs24 (quoted in Bukatman 1993: 139). But you cannot go on screening out problems forever. Like Mark Dery and Donna Haraway, the Krokers want to bring technoutopians like Leary to their senses and alert them to the real problems. The longer the high, the bitterer the come-down. If we do not start to fight our computer addiction now it might be too late because \ldblquote speed kills.\rdblquote \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1031\f1 4.7.4. McLuhan revisited \par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033\f0\par Most people in the cyberdelic counterculture of the 90s consider media philosopher Marshall McLuhan to be the grandfather of cyberpunk because as early as 1964 he was talking about a \ldblquote global village\rdblquote borne of communication technologies, a concept which evolved, over time, to his vision of the \ldblquote [p]sychic communal integration of all humankind, made possible at last by the electronic media\rdblquote (Dery 1996: 45). Many cyber-philosophers (Leary, McKenna, Rushkoff, etc) were strongly influenced by McLuhan\rquote s work. Leary\rquote s optimism about the future of the Internet, for example, was inspired by McLuhan who, in \i Understanding Media\i0 (1964), suggested that with electric technology (electronic media) we extend our nervous systems in a global embrace, instantly interrelating every human experience. Consequently, the electronic media would reshape and restructure patterns of social interdependence and end psychic, social, economic, and political self-centeredness (see chapter 3.4.). Throughout his theories Leary uses McLuhan\rquote s ideas (especially the idea that \ldblquote all media [technologies] are extensions of some human faculty \endash psychic or physical\rdblquote ) to support the idea that technology can help us to liberate ourselves from all limits. Also Leary\rquote s equation that \ldblquote spiritual = digital\rdblquote seems to be inspired by McLuhan who, in \i Understanding Media\i0 , wrote that \ldblquote the current transformation of our entire lives into the spiritual form of information seems to make of the entire globe, and of the human family, a single consciousness\rdblquote (quoted in Howard 1982: 390). \par However, Leary never mentions that McLuhan actually had a highly ambivalent attitude towards technology. \ldblquote McLuhan was never the technotopian that contemporary technophiles like to portray,\rdblquote writes Arthur Kroker. \ldblquote To read McLuhan is to discover a thinker who had a decidedly ambivalent perspective on technoculture. Thus, while McLuhan might be the patron saint of technotopians, his imagination is also the memory that should haunt them\i \i0 (Kroker 1997: 89). \par This chapter, which is based on Kroker\rquote s essay \ldblquote Digital Humanism: The processed world of Marshall McLuhan\rdblquote (Kroker 1997: 89-113), offers a new way of understanding McLuhan and is, at the same time, a criticism of Leary\rquote s techno-utopianism. McLuhan\rquote s discourse on technology provides a brilliant understanding of the inner functioning of the technological media, which might help us \ldblquote to break the seduction effect of technology, to disturb the hypnotic spell cast by the dynamism of the technological imperative\rdblquote (Korker 1997: 102). \par According to McLuhan, the nature of technology is paradoxical: On the one hand, all technologies are \i extensions\i0 of the human being (e.g., the wheel is an extension of the foot); on the other hand, every extension by technology is simultaneously a \ldblquote\i self-amputation\i0\rdblquote of the part of the body that is extended (by using the wheel/car we \ldblquote self-amputate\rdblquote our feet because we do not use them to walk any more) (cf. McLuhan 1964: 42). This means that we extend ourselves by self-amputation. According to McLuhan, the history of technological innovation can best be understood in terms of experimental medicine. In \i Understanding Media\i0 , he gives much attention to Hans Seleye\rquote s work in the field of stress, especially the biological phenomenon that under conditions of deep stress an organism \ldblquote self-amputates\rdblquote the organ effected by anesthetizing it in order to protect itself (cf. Kroker 1997: 100ff.). (For example, when an organ of the body goes out it automatically goes numb. The organism automatically self-amputates it.) In \i Digital Delirium, \i0 Arthur and Marilouise Kroker explain McLuhan\rquote s medical approach to technology as follows:\par \par \pard\li705\qj\fs20 McLuhan\rquote s historical account of the evolution of technological media was structured around a (medical) account of the evolution of technological innovation as \ldblquote counter-irritants\rdblquote to the \ldblquote stress of acceleration of pace and increase of load. Just as the body (in Hans Seleye\rquote s terms) resorts to an auto-amputative strategy when \ldblquote the perceptual power cannot locate or avoid the cause of irritation,\rdblquote so (in McLuhan\rquote s terms) in the stress of super-stimulation, \ldblquote the central nervous system acts to protect itself by a strategy of amputation or isolation of the offending organ, sense, or function.\rdblquote Technology is a \ldblquote counter-irritant\rdblquote which aids in the \ldblquote equilibrium of the physical organs which protect the central nervous system.\rdblquote Thus, the wheel (as an extension of the foot) is a counter-irritant against the pressure of \ldblquote new burdens resulting from the acceleration of exchange by written and monetary media;\rdblquote \ldblquote movies and TV complete the cycle of mechanization of the human sensorium;\rdblquote and computers are ablations or outerings of the human brain itself (Kroker 1997: 103) \par \pard\qj\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj According to the Krokers, it was McLuhan\rquote s thesis that the motive-force for technological innovation was always defensive and biological: The nervous system tries to protect itself against sudden changes in the \ldblquote stimulus\rdblquote of the external environment by using the physical organs (that is, the technologies which extend these organs as) \ldblquote buffers.\rdblquote In times of high stress, humans always invent new technologies \endash that is, they extend, or \ldblquote outer,\rdblquote individual organs \endash so the nervous system can protect itself against the stress of acceleration of pace. But each \ldblquote outering\rdblquote of individual organs is also an acceleration and intensification of the general environment. So it seems that humans are caught in some kind of vicious circle. (high stress > we invent new technologies to protect the nervous system > acceleration of the environment > high stress...).\par According to McLuhan, in the electronic age we reached the culmination of this process. The environment changed so fast that \ldblquote in a desperate [...] autoamputation, as if the central nervous system could no longer depend on the physical organs as buffers against the slings and arrows of outrageous mechanism\rdblquote (McLuhan 1964: 43), the central nervous system itself was outered in the form of electric circuitry (computers, the Internet, etc). In other words, the nervous system has gone numb. According to McLuhan, this outering of the central nervous system induced an unprecedented level of stress on the individual organism (cf. McLuhan 1964: 252). McLuhan argues that the electric age is an age of \ldblquote anxiety and dread\rdblquote because we are unable to cope with this new situation; we are unable to understand the subliminal consequences of the fundamental changes in technostructure (cf. Kroker 1997: 101ff.). \par McLuhan tried to make people aware that it is futile to deny that technology exists and that it is actually a part of us. The only way we could really understand technology is to experience it and try to become aware how it changes our perception of the world. If we are to recover a new human possibility it will not be \ldblquote outside\rdblquote the technological experience, but must be \ldblquote inside\rdblquote the field of technology (cf. Kroker 1997: 95). According to McLuhan, only a sharpening and refocusing of human perception could provide a way out of the \ldblquote labyrinth of the technostructure\rdblquote (cf. ibid.). In \i Digital Delirium\i0 , Arthur Kroker writes that \ldblquote [McLuhan\rquote s] ideal value was that of the \lquote creative process in art,\rquote so much so in fact that McLuhan insisted that if the master struggle of the twentieth century was between reason and irrationality, then this struggle could be won if individuals learned anew how to make of the simple act of \lquote ordinary human perception\rquote an opportunity for recovering the creative energies in human experience\rdblquote (ibid.). According to McLuhan, we will never fully understand the subliminal effects of technology and be able to use technology to increase our intelligence, creativity, and freedom, if we do not first become aware of the \ldblquote double-effect of the technological experience\rdblquote - that all technologies are simultaneously extensions and self-amputations of some human mental or physical faculty (cf. ibid.).\par When Leary talks about McLuhan, he never mentions the double-effect of technology and McLuhan\rquote s warnings that the hypnotic spell of technology can be very dangerous. It seems that Leary himself was under the hypnotic spell of technology McLuhan was talking about, when he praised the computer, the Internet, and virutal reality as cure-all for all problems on our planet. There is a noticeable similarity between Leary\rquote s LSD-euphoria in the 60s \endash Leary\rquote s revealing LSD experiences caused him to believe that LSD would cure our \ldblquote sick\rdblquote society and help us create a new post-political society based on Ecstasy \endash and his computer-euphoria in the 80s and 90s. Unfortunately, neither LSD nor computers did bring the changes which Leary predicted. The Internet and other new communication technologies have decentralized our society, extended our nervous systems globally, but are we really free now?\par \pard\qj\lang1031\par \pard\par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\ul\b\f1\fs28 5. \fs32 Conclusion\par \pard\ulnone\b0\f0\fs24\par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\lang1033\b\i\f1\fs28 5.1. Leary: a pioneer of cyberspace\par \pard\lang1031\b0\i0\f0\fs24\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\lang1033 Whether you share Leary\rquote s utopian faith in technology or not, Leary\rquote s impact on the cyberdelic counterculture of the 80s and 90s is undeniable. In this paper I have shown that several important figures of the cyber-movement were strongly influenced by Leary (e.g., Douglas Rushkoff, R.U. Sirius, and Bruce Eisner) and that Leary was actually one of the founding fathers of the cyber-movement. As early as 1973, Leary predicted that someday the world would be linked together through a new \ldblquote electronic nervous system,\rdblquote a global electronic communication network which would dissolve authoritarian hierarchical structures. In \i Exo-Pschology\i0 (1977), Leary encouraged the hippies to leave the flower-power 60s behind and find a way to live with technology which, according to Leary, could help us to free ourselves from all limits. In his Exo-Psychology theory, Leary laid the ideological foundation for the cyber-movement. In his model of the Eight Circuits of Consciousness, which is explained in \i Exo-Psychology\i0 , Leary defined a \ldblquote higher\rdblquote level of consciousness (attained with the help of LSD) on which space, time, body, and normal speech (sending/receiving laryngeal signals) are transcended and people communicate at light speed on the electromagnetic level. This \ldblquote higher\rdblquote level of consciousness, the \ldblquote Neuroelectric Circuit,\rdblquote was later interpreted by members of the cyber-movement as cyberspace or the Internet (see chapter 3.5.).\par Many people are surprised when they hear that Leary, the famous LSD-guru of the hippies, reemerged in the 80s as a spokesman of the cyberpunks, because they can see no connection between the anti-technology-oriented hippies and the cyberpunks who embrace technology. If we analyze Leary\rquote s theories, however, we see that there actually is a strong connection between the psychedelic counterculture of the 60s and the cyberdelic counterculture of the 80s and 90s. We see that the cyberpunks of the 80s and 90s were heavily influenced by the transcendentalism that prevailed in the 60s counterculture (see chapter 4.7.2.). According to Leary, the hippies of the 60s and the cyberpunks of the 80s and 90s actually belong to one and the same movement because they share the same aim: Ecstasy, that is, the experience of individual freedom. Leary argues that the individual freedom revolution started by the hippies in the 60s was continued by cyberpunks in the 80s. According to Leary, this individual freedom movement, which has country by country, continent by continent, liberated much of the world in the last three decades (e.g., the fall of communism in Eastern Europe), would not have been possible without mind-expanding drugs (psychedelics) and mind-linking electronic appliances (computers, radio, TV, etc). \par Leary was definitely right when he said that the electronic media (TV, Internet, etc) played a crucial role in the youth revolutions of 1989 which lead to the fall of the Berlin Wall and the resignation of the hard-line regime in Czechoslovakia. However, when Leary argued that computers, the Internet, and other electronic media have only positive effects (i.e., they create individual freedom), he was definitely wrong. In the 80s, when Leary wrote most of his essays on the cyberpunks and the Internet, it was not so obvious that the decentralization created by the Internet is a double edged sword, that it slowly dissolves old hierarchical political structures while at the same time empowering the powerful, autocratic, multinational corporations. The 80s were the heyday of the cyberpunk-computer-hackers, who dominated the Internet, cracking government files, etc. It was a time when anything seem to be possible because nobody really knew in which direction the Internet would change our society. Now, however, the cyberdelic revolution is over. The cyberdelic counterculture which Leary helped to create is absorbed into the mainstream. This trip is over. The Internet has become a \ldblquote playing field for a mutating corporate oligarchy.\rdblquote \par Leary\rquote s prediction that the feedback and decentralization made possible by the Internet would help the cyber-movement to create a post-political society based on Ecstasy (i.e., the experience of individual freedom) turned out to be wrong. Leary\rquote s utopian faith in technology blinded him to the real situation on our planet.\par \par \par \pard\keepn\sb240\sa60\b\i\f1\fs28 5.2. Think for Yourself, Question Authority\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\i0\f0\fs24 \par I think that this paper shows that Leary was an extremely complex man. He was, first and foremost, the man who brought psychedelic drugs into American culture. He was the undisputed leader of the psychedelic movement. But Leary was also a psychologist, a philosopher, a novelist, one of the most energetic promoters of virtual reality and the Internet, a spokesman of the \ldblquote new edge\rdblquote cyberpunks, and an eloquent defender of individual rights. Leary saw himself as a philosopher more than anything else - a philosopher whose duty it was to teach people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority\rdblquote (cf. DD 6).\par In this last chapter I argue that the overall message that Leary wants to communicate in his theories is \ldblquote Think for yourself; question authority.\rdblquote I want to show that Leary\rquote s whole\par trip from psychedelics to computers to designer dying was to make people aware that they are capable of more than the appointed authorities would prefer to grant them. Leary\rquote s advocacy of psychedelics and computers was to show that people are capable of taking charge of their own brains, hearts, and spirits. For me, Leary is the Socrates of the Information Age because he was one of the few philosophers in our age who carried on the Socratic tradition of encouraging people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority,\rdblquote his own authority included. \par Leary never felt embarrassed when one of his predictions turned out to be wrong. Why? Because he saw himself as a philosopher whose job it was to teach people HOW to think, not WHAT to think (cf. NP 2). Leary wanted to teach people to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority.\rdblquote In every single book he wrote Leary explicitly encourages his readers to \ldblquote think for themselves and question authority,\rdblquote his own authority included. In the introduction to \i Neuropolitique\i0 , Leary explains that philosophers in the Information Age \ldblquote do not come down the mountain with truths carved in stone.\rdblquote The professional assignment of the philosopher in the Information Age is \ldblquote to produce new paradigms which will inspire and encourage others to think for themselves. Today philosophers do not give people food for thought. They teach people how to think, how to conceive themselves\rdblquote (NP 2). \par \ldblquote Don\rquote t believe anything I say. [...] Start Your Own Religion [...] Write Your Own Bible [...] Start Your Own Political System,\rdblquote Leary writes in \i The Politics of Ecstasy \i0 (PE 369f.). Also, in his last book, \i Desing for Dying\i0 , he repeatedly tells his readers that they should never \i believe\i0 anything he says because he does \ldblquote not believe in belief\rdblquote (cf. DD 26, DD 31). For Leary, belief \endash in the sense of absolute belief, i.e., a dogma \endash is always something negative. Dogma means stagnation, inflexibility, no choice, and therefore no freedom (cf. CC 232ff.). Leary argues that whatever you blindly believe in imprisons you. Blind belief is the death of the intellect. He compares beliefs to filters in the human perceptual apparatus which filter the information that is received from the outside world. This means that all the information from the outside world which does not confirm one\rquote s belief cannot pass the filter and therefore is ignored (see chapter 4.3.). In \i Chaos & Cyberculture\i0 , Leary explains that a person who clings to one belief system and never questions this belief system will never be able to increase his/her intelligence because his/her mind will shut out any kind of information which is new or cannot be explained within his/her frame of reference (cf. CC 35ff.). Neither will he/she be tolerant towards people with other beliefs (cf. ibid.). \par Another reason why Leary rejects dogmas is that they can easily be used to manipulate people. All \ldblquote power-hungry control freaks\rdblquote try to impose dogmas on people because they very well know that a dogma is a powerful instrument to create conformity and predictable behavior. In his theories Leary constantly alerts us to the dangers of dogmas and conformity (the Inquisition, the Holy War, the Nazi regime, etc) and tries to make us aware that there is no reason whatsoever why we should accept the dogmas that authorities are trying to impose on us. Again and again he reminds his readers that all dogmas, like all scientific theories, are arbitrary constructions. He tries to make his readers aware of the fact that science, like all cultural phenomena, is socially determined \endash blinkered by the biases of the society that produced it and dedicated it to the validation of its own worldview. While supposedly objective, science often aids and abets political ideology and cultural bias. Like the constructivists, Leary argues that anybody who claims that his/her belief system (model of reality) is the absolute truth is simply wrong. You create your own reality. Ergo, \ldblquote think for yourself, question authority\rdblquote .\par Leary wants us to take responsibility for our own lives (this is a logical consequence of the constructivist worldview), not to pass on the responsibility for ourselves to somebody else \endash be it a politician, scientists, or an \ldblquote omnipotent\rdblquote God (Christ, Allah, etc) who resides somewhere up in heaven. \ldblquote God is not a tribal father, nor a feudal lord, nor an engineer-manager of the universe. \i There is no God\i0 (in the singular) \i except you at the moment\i0 [italics mine],\rdblquote Leary explains. \ldblquote Since God #1 appears to be held hostage back there by the blood-thirsty Persian ayatollah, by the telegenic Polish pope, and the Moral Majority, there\rquote s only one logical alternative. You \lquote steer\rquote your own course. You and your dear friends start your own religion. [...] Write your very own Newest Testament, remembering that voluntary martyrdom is tacky, and crucifications, like nuclear war, can ruin your day\rdblquote (CC 234f.). \par When Leary advises us to start our own religion he does not mean that we should found a religion that is based on dogmas. Dogmas are static; they \ldblquote imprison\rdblquote us, which means that they are not good for our personal intellectual and spiritual development. But what are the alternatives to dogma? According to Leary, the idea of belief can be broken down into two categories: \i dogmas\i0 , which are absolute beliefs, and\i meta-beliefs\i0 , which are relative beliefs (cf. ibid.). The idea of meta-belief is based on the constructivist assumption that \ldblquote reality\rdblquote is a construction of out minds. \ldblquote Meta-belief\rdblquote means that you consciously program yourself to believe in something, knowing that your belief is not the absolute truth but a construction of your mind. It means that you are aware that your beliefs are programs in your brain which can arbitrarily changed. For Leary, it was not really important that we do not (or cannot) know anything about objective reality. Leary\rquote s aim was freedom of the mind, Ecstasy (i.e., the experience of freedom from all limits). Ecstasy, \ldblquote ex-stasis,\rdblquote is the opposite of \ldblquote stasis\rdblquote (which means that you have a static worldview). According to Leary, in the mind there are no limits except those that you set for yourself. \ldblquote You can change and mutate and keep improving. The idea is to keep \lquote trading up\rquote to a \lquote better\rquote philosophy-theology,\rdblquote Leary writes (CC 234). As John Lilly put it, \ldblquote In the province of the mind, what is believed to be true is true or becomes true, within limits to be found experientially and experimentally. These limits are further beliefs to be transcended. In the province of the mind, there are no limits\rdblquote (Lilly 1972: xvi).\par Philosophers who encourage people to think for themselves, question authority and create their own religion/politics have always been considered to be dangerous, heretical, immoral, blasphemous by law-and-order fanatics. Socrates was one of these philosophers who was accused \ldblquote by conservative minds of the dangerous game of discomfiting all authority before a circle of impressionable youths and subtracting from the state the stability of tradition [...] his unsettling effect on the young and his persistent criticism were intolerable to any establishment\rdblquote (Harkavy 1991: 531). Leary is the Socrates of the Information Age. In our age there are very few philosophers (e.g., Paul Feyerabend, or Robert Anton Wilson) who carry on the Socratic tradition of encouraging people to think for themselves and question authority, their own authority included. Leary was perhaps the most enthusiastic of these humanistic philosophers. \par Like Socrates, Leary tried to make people aware that what we accept as objective reality is only a construction of our minds and that the only way to realize our true selves is to question everything we have learned from our parents, teachers, politicians, etc (cf. ibid.). Socrates\rquote method to make people think about unquestioned \ldblquote truths\rdblquote was asking them questions until they themselves realized that they actually \ldblquote knew nothing\rdblquote (in the sense of absolute knowledge). This is what Socrates called the \ldblquote knowledge of not-knowing\rdblquote (cf. ibid.). Leary\rquote s method was to confront people with his provocative theories which were intended to make people question the models of reality that authorities imposed on them, and to encourage people to create their own (funnier, sexier, more optimistic) realities. Technology (computers, LSD, etc) would help us to liberate ourselves from authority and to create our own realities. \par Leary was very unpopular among academics because he did not follow the rules an academic philosopher or psychologist is supposed to follow. Leary\rquote s theories are a mixture of fact and fiction and often you do not know if the pseudo-scientific explanations Leary gives to back his far-out ideas, are meant seriously or if they are meant as a joke. Furthermore, many of Leary\rquote s arguments involve contradictions and often he quotes somebody without giving the source of the quotation, which can drive a serious critic crazy. Leary, however, did not seem to feel embarrassed about the inconsistencies in his theories. On the contrary, I think that he \i wanted\i0 to be chaotic and uncontrollable, and defy the laws of western linear reason. Leary wanted create a language (i.e., a way of thinking) that cannot be controlled by those who are trying to impose the status quo and a linear view. People who believe exclusively in a linear straight forward way of thinking cannot understand Leary. You cannot control someone you do not understand because you are just not able to predict the person\rquote s next thought/action - and so, I believe, Leary has achieved at least one of his objectives: to be uncontrollable. \par According to Leary, the basic nature of the universe is chaos, extreme complexity that cannot be understood by the human mind so far. What we know is that \ldblquote change and disequilibrium are the driving forces of the universe\rdblquote and that stability is an illusion (cf. DD 52f.). Leary never grew tired of pointing out that politicians, priests and (most) scientists try to make people believe in the idea of stability because they want to remain in power. They try to impose a static worldview on us because they know that you can control a stable, predictable system, but there is no way to control a chaotic system that is continually changing. According to Leary, this is the reason why the government is against psychedelic drugs. Psychedelic drugs would make us aware that stability is an illusion and \ldblquote that we have been programmed all those years, that everything we accept as reality is just a social fabrication\rdblquote (FB 33). \par Leary\rquote s way of thinking is chaotic and unpredictable. This is why we can never fully understand Leary. However, what we can learn from him is how to become more flexible, open-minded, and creative - qualities that are very important if we want to survive in our modern Information Society in which the change rate is accelerating beyond comprehension and control. Leary wants to teach us to \ldblquote go with the flow\rdblquote \endash not to cling to idea-structures, but to change, to evolve (cf. CC xiv). \ldblquote Be cool. Don\rquote t panic. Chaos is good. Chaos creates infinite possibilities,\rdblquote Leary says (ibid.). To go with the flow means that you think for yourself and that you are not afraid of change. It means that you accept the fact that you live in a chaotic world that is continually changing. You cannot control chaos, but you can learn to \ldblquote surf the waves of chaos.\rdblquote \par Surf\rquote s up. Enjoy your ride. \par \par \par \par \pard\keepn\sl360\slmult1\qj\b\f1\page\fs28 Sources\par \pard\sl360\slmult1\qj\b0\f0\fs24\par \pard\b Abbreviations: \par \b0\fs20\par \pard\fi-708\li708 PsyE =\i The Psychedelic Experience\i0 ,1964. \par NP = \i Neuropolitique, \i0 1988b.\par Info = \i Info-Psychology, \i0 1990a.\par FB = \i Flashbacks,\i0 1990b.\par PE = \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 , 1990c. \par CC = \i Chaos and Cyberculture\i0 ,1994.\par \pard DD = \i Design for Dying, 1997.\par \i0\par \par \b\fs24 Primary Sources/Works by Timothy Leary:\par \b0\fs20\par Leary, Timothy. \'84The Dimensions of Intelligence.\ldblquote M. S. thesis, Washington State University, 1946.\par Leary, Timothy. \'84Social Dimensions of Personality.\ldblquote Ph.D. thesis, University of California, 1950.\par Leary, Timothy. \i The Interpersonal Diagnosis of Personality\i0 . John Wiley, 1957.\par Leary, Timothy. \i The Existential Transaction\i0 . Psychological Consultation Service, 1957.\par Leary, Timothy\i . The Psychedelic Experience\i0 . University Books, 1964. \par Leary, Timothy. \i The Psychedelic Experience\ul\i0 .\ulnone Translated into HTML by Den Walter. Online. Internet. 20 Mar. 1998. Available \i \i0 \cf1\lang1031\ul http://hyperreal.com/drugs/psychedelics/leary/psychedelic.html\cf0\lang1033\ulnone\par Leary, Timothy. \i You can be anyone this time around.\i0 (LP)\i \i0 London: UFO Records, 1972.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Neuropolitics. \i0 San Diego: 88 Books, 1977a.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Exo-Psychology\i0 . San Diego: 88 Books, 1977b.\par Leary, Timothy. \i The Game of Life. \i0 San Diego: 88 Books, 1977c.\par Leary, Timothy. \i The Intelligence Agents\i0 . Peace Press, 1979 (Tempe, Arizona: New Falcon, 1996).\par Leary, Timothy. \i What does WoMan want?\i0 Tempe, Arizona: New Falcon , 1988a.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Neuropolitique. \i0 Tempe, Arizona: New Falcon , 1988b.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Info-Psychology\i0 . Las Vegas: Falcon Press, 1990a.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Flashbacks\i0 . New York: Putnam, 1990b.\par Leary, Timothy. \i The Politics of Ecstasy\i0 . Berkeley: Ronin, 1990c.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Chaos and Cyberculture\i0 . Berkeley: Ronin, 1994.\par Leary, Timothy. \i High Priest\i0 . Berkeley: Ronin, 1995.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Neurologic. \i0 L\'f6hrbach, Germany: Werner Pieper\rquote s Medienexperimente, 1996.\par Leary, Timothy. \i Psychedelic Prayers and Other Meditations\i0 . Berkeley: Ronin, 1997a.\par Leary, Timothy\i . Design for Dying\i0 . San Francisco: Harper, 1997b.\par \par \par \b\fs24 Secondary sources:\par \b0\fs20\par Alli, Antero. \i Angel Tech \endash A modern Shaman\rquote s Guide to Reality Selection.\i0 Las Vegas: Falcon, 1996.\par Benedikt, Michael. \i Cyberspace: First Steps\i0 . Cambridge, Mass. and London: MIT Press, 1991. \par Bertram, Eva, et al. \i Drug war politics: the price of denial.\i0 Berkeley: Univ. of Calif. Press, 1996.\par Brewster, Roger. \ldblquote Dr. Timothy Leary Interview.\rdblquote \i Telegraph\i0 (10.1995). n. pag. Online. Internet. 20 Mar. 1998. Available \cf1\ul http://scistc.ac.uk/~bu6010/leary.html\cf0\ulnone\par Buick, Joanna, and Zoran Jevtic. \i Cyberspace for Beginners\i0 . Cambridge: Icon, 1995.\par Bukatman, Scott. \i Terminal Identity\i0 . Durham and London: Duke UP, 1993. \par Capra, Fritjof\i . The Turning Point\i0 . New York: Bantam, 1982.\par Dery, Mark. \i Escape Velocity: Cyberculture at the End of the Century.\i0 London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1996.\par Davis, Paul. \i Timothy Leary is dead\i0 . A film produced by Arts & Education Media, Inc., Berkeley, CA, 1996. (Broadcast on ORF, 1997.)\par Eisner, Bruce. \ldblquote Timothy Leary\rquote s Ultimate Trip.\rdblquote \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 . Vol. 2, Issue 2 (1996) pp. 5-9.\par Eisner, Bruce. \i Ecstasy: The MDMA Story.\i0 Berkeley: Ronin, 1989.\par Eisner, Bruce. \ldblquote Bruce Eisner\rquote s Story.\rdblquote n. pag. Online. Internet. 17 June 1998. Available \cf1\ul http://www.island.org/BRUCE.html\cf0\ulnone \par \i Fried Shoes, Cooked Diamonds.\i0 Filmed by Constanzo Allione. Manufactured and distributed by Mystic Fire Video. New York, 1978.\par Eisner, Bruce, ed. \i Psychedelic Island Views.\i0 Vol. 2, Issue 2 (1996).\par Eisner, Bruce, ed. \i Psychedelic Island Views. \i0 Vol. 3, Issue 1 (1997).\par Gibson, William. \i Neuromancer\i0 . London: HarperCollins, 1995.\par Grof, Stanislov. \i Realms of the Human Unconscious\i0 . New York: Dutton, 1976.\par Harkavy, Michael, ed. \i The New Webster\rquote s International Encyclopedia\i0 . Naples, Florida: Trident Press, 1991.\par Hofmann, Albert. LSD: \i My Problemchild\i0 . New York: McGraw-Mill, 1980.\par Huxley, Aldous. \i Doors of Perception\i0 and \i Heaven and Hell.\i0 Harmondsworth, Middlesex, Engl.: Penguin, 1972.\par Island Foundation. n. pag. Online. Internet. 17 June 1998. Available \cf1\ul http://www.island.org\cf0\ulnone \par Jung, Carl Gustav. \ldblquote The concept of the Collective Unconscious\rdblquote The Collected Works of Carl G. Jung. Ed. Read et al. Vol. 9 Princeton: Princeton UP, 1936.\par Kroker, Arthur, and Marilouise Kroker. \i Digital Delirium\i0 . Montreal: New World Perspectives, 1997.\par Lilly, John. \i Programming and Metaprogramming in the Human Bio-Computer\i0 . New York: Julian Press, 1967.\par McKenna, Terence, and Dennis McKenna. \i The Invisible Landscape\i0 . New York: Seabury Press, 1975.\par McKenna, Terence. \i Food of the Gods\i0 . London: Rider, 1992.\par McKenna, Terence. Home page \cf1\ul http://deoxy.org/mckenna.html\cf0\ulnone .\par McLuhan, Marshall. \i Understanding Media. \i0 New York: McGraw Hill, 1964.\par McLuhan, Marshall. \i The Medium is the Massage. \i0 New York: Bantam, 1967.\par McLuhan, Marshall. \i Counter Blast. \i0 Toronto: McClelland and Steward, 1969.\par Roszak, Theodore\i . The making of a counterculture\i0 . Berkeley: Univ. of Calif. Press, 1995.\par Rucker, Rudy, R. U. Sirius, and Queen Mu, eds. \i Mondo 2000: a user\rquote s guide to the new edge.\i0 New York: HarperCollins, 1992.\par Rushkoff, Douglas. \i Cyberia: Life in the Trenches of Hyperspace\i0 . San Francisco: HarperCollins, 1995. \par Rushkoff, Douglas. \ldblquote Loved by Leary\rdblquote . \i Psychedelic Island Views\i0 . Vol. 2, Issue 2 (1996) p. 47.\par Rushkoff, Douglas. Email to the author (containing an article published in the Guardian of London: \ldblquote Timothy, Allen, and Bill: Godfathers of Cyberspace). 11 Sept. 1997.\par Rushkoff, Douglas. \i Ecstasy Club\i0 . New York: Harper, 1997.\par Rushkoff, Douglas. \ldblquote Electronica: The True Cyber Culture.\rdblquote n. pag. Online. Internet. 29 Aug 1998. Available \cf1\ul http://www.levity.com/rushkoff/electronica.html\cf0\ulnone \par Saunders, Nicolas. \i E for Ecstasy.\i0 London: Saunders, 1993.\par Shulgin, Alexander and Ann. \i PHIKAL: A Chemical Love Story.\i0 Berkeley: Transform Press, 1995.\par Spivey, Nancy Nelson. \i The Constructivist Metaphor\i0 . San Diego: Academic Press, 1997.\par Stafford, Peter. \i Psychedelics Encyclopedia. \i0 Berkeley: Ronin, 1992.\par Six, Gary. \ldblquote Waiting for Breakthroughs\rdblquote . n. pag. Online. Internet. 16 Mai 1998. Available\par \cf1\ul http://www.sciam.com/exhibit/040000trends.html\cf0\ulnone \par Sterling, Bruce, ed. \i Mirrorshades: The Cyberpunk Anthology\i0 . New York: Arbor House, 1986.\par Wasson, R. Gordon. \i Soma: Divine Mushroom of Immortality\i0 . New York, Harcourt: Brace, 1968.\par Watzlawick, Paul, ed. \i The invented reality\i0 . New York: Norton, 1984. \par Watzlawick, Paul, ed. \i Die erfundene Wirklichkeit\i0 . M\'fcnchen: Piper, 1998.\par Weil, G. ,ed. \i The Psychedelic Reader\i0 . Secaucus, New Yersy: The Citadel Press, 1973.\par Williams, Paul. \i Das Energi\i0 . New York: Warner Books, 1978.\par Wilson, Robert Anton. \i Prometheus Rising.\i0 Las Vegas: Falcon Press, 1983.\par Wilson, Robert Anton. \i Quantum Psychology.\i0 Tempe, Arizona: New Falcon, 1996.\par Wilson, Robert Anton.\i Cosmic Trigger. The Final Secret of the Illuminati.\i0 Tempe, Arizona: New Falcon, 1997.\par Wolfe, Tom. \i The Electric Kool-Aid Acid Test\i0 . New York: Bantam, 1969.\par \i \par \i0\par \lang1031\par }